You are on page 1of 366

AN5006-20

Small-Sized Integrated Access


Device

MSAN Configuration Guide


Version: B/1

Code: MN000001806

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

April 2015
Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.


We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China


Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.


(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be


reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface

Related Documentation
Document Description

Introduces the AN5006-20’s network location, functional


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
features, hardware structure, application model, equipment
Integrated Access Device
configuration, network management system and technical
Product Description
specifications.

Introduces the appearance, structure, functions, technical


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
specifications, and operation of the AN5006-20’s cabinet,
Integrated Access Device
PDP, subrack, cards, cables and wires, so as to facilitate
Hardware Description
users’ mastery of the hardware features of the equipment.

Introduces the overall installation and acceptance


inspection procedures from unpacking inspection to power-
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
on test after the AN5006-20 is delivered to the construction
Integrated Access Device
site, and provides reference information (e.g. safety
Installation Guide
principles and wiring scheme of a variety of interfaces) to
guide users to install the equipment.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Introduces how to install the AN5006-20 and how to


Integrated Access Device Quick connect and lay out wires and cables for it using
Installation Guide illustrations.
Introduces the method for configuring the MSAN services
supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device MSAN
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

I
Document Description

Introduces the method for configuring the EPON services


supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device EPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

Introduces the method for configuring the GPON services


supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device GPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

II
Version
Version Description

A Initial version
Corresponds to Version 3.1 of the AN5006-20.
B The corresponding UNM2000 version is
V1.0R1 Build13.08.01.02.

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u xDSL access principle

u Ethernet switching technology

u Computer network technology

u Internet Protocol

u V5 Protocol

u PON technology

III
Conventions

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention
FiberHome AN5006-20 Small-sized Integrated Access
AN5006-20
Device
FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management
UNM2000
System

MCU-EPON Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON Manage Control Card

MCU-EPON2 Manage Control Card

MCU-GPON2 Manage Control Card

MCUA Manage Control Card

MCUB Manage Control Card

MCUC Manage Control Card

MCUD Manage Control Card

AD32 32 Lines ADSL2+ Card


AD64 64 Lines ADSL2+ Card
CASA 32 Ports ADSL2+ and POTS Combo Board
VD32 32 Lines VDSL Card
POTS32 32 Ports POTS Card
POTS 64 Ports POTS Card
HD32A 32-port SHDSL Interfacing Card

HDT8A High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8A Card

HDT8B High bit rate Digital TDM 8B

PWRB Power Card (Type B)

FANB Fan Unit


HCU-20 Environment monitoring device

IV
Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic


Caution
interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

î Jump Jumps to another step.

Cascading
í Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
î The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
í The service signal is unidirectional.
service

V
Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Related Documentation ...................................................................................I

Version ..........................................................................................................III

Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III

Conventions ................................................................................................. IV

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel.........................................1-1

1.1 Logging into the Console ...............................................................1-2

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console.........................................1-2


1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console.....................................1-5

1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel...........................1-6

1.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................1-6


1.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................1-7
1.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................1-8
1.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................1-12
1.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN ...............................1-13
1.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN..........................................1-13
1.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing........................................1-13
1.2.8 Configuration Result ......................................................1-14

1.3 Logging into the UNM2000...........................................................1-14

2 Adding Equipment .......................................................................................2-1

2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................................2-2

2.2 Configuration Flow.........................................................................2-2

2.3 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-3

2.4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-5

2.5 Adding Cards.................................................................................2-7

2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically .............................................2-7


2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually ....................................................2-9

2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-10


2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-11

2.8 Synchronizing Time .....................................................................2-12

2.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-13

3 Configuring Voice Services ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248 .......................3-2

3.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................3-2


3.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................3-2
3.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................3-3
3.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................3-8
3.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port...................................................3-9
3.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-11
3.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-12
3.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform
Parameters....................................................................3-13
3.1.9 Configuring the Voice IP Address ...................................3-13
3.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-14
3.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ............................3-15
3.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-15
3.1.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-16
3.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ............................3-16
3.1.15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status ..............................3-17
3.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-18
3.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-19

3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP.........................3-20

3.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................3-20


3.2.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................3-20
3.2.3 Planning Data ................................................................3-21
3.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-27
3.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port.................................................3-28
3.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-30
3.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-31
3.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server.............................................3-32
3.2.9 Configuring the Voice IP Address ...................................3-33
3.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-33
3.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .........................................3-34
3.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-35
3.2.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-36
3.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ............................3-36
3.2.15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status ..............................3-37
3.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-37
3.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-38

3.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service................................3-39

3.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................3-40


3.3.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................3-41
3.3.3 Planning Data ................................................................3-42
3.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-46
3.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1.3-46
3.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 .3-52
3.3.7 Configuration Result ......................................................3-57

3.4 Common Configuration ................................................................3-59

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters........................3-59


3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer ...........................................3-60
3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile ...........................................3-60
3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters ..........................................3-61
3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number ........................3-62
3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number...........................................3-62
3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.......3-63
3.4.8 2833 Configuration ........................................................3-64

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration..................................................3-64

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ...........................3-65


3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing
Parameters....................................................................3-65
3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ..........................3-66

3.6 SIP Configuration.........................................................................3-67

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration ..........................................3-67


3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ..............................3-68

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-68

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User ....................................3-69

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information .......................................3-70

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ....3-70


3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ............................3-70
3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port...3-71
3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information.....................3-72

4 Configuring Data Services ...........................................................................4-1

4.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent


Mode .............................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................4-2


4.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................4-2
4.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................4-3
4.1.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-10
4.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-12
4.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-12
4.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-13
4.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-14
4.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-15
4.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-16
4.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-17
4.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-19
4.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-22
4.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-24
4.1.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-26

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode ......4-26

4.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-26


4.2.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-26
4.2.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-27
4.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-33
4.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-35
4.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-35
4.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-36
4.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-37
4.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-38
4.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-40
4.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-41
4.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-41
4.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-45
4.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-47
4.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-48
4.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-48

4.3.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-48


4.3.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-49
4.3.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-50
4.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-56
4.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-58
4.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-58
4.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-59
4.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-60
4.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-61
4.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-62
4.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-63
4.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-64
4.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-67
4.3.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-68

4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-69

4.4.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-69


4.4.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................4-70
4.4.3 Planning Data ................................................................4-70
4.4.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-76
4.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-77
4.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-77
4.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-78
4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-79
4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-80
4.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-81
4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-82
4.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-83
4.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-84
4.4.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-85

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service................................................................5-1

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM ........5-2

5.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................5-2


5.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................5-2
5.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................5-3
5.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................5-9
5.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes .............................5-11
5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port................................................5-11
5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................5-13
5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................5-15
5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-15
5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-16
5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................5-18
5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile ........................5-18
5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................5-20
5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...........5-21
5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound
Group ............................................................................5-23
5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................5-23
5.1.17 Configuration Result ......................................................5-27

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local


Mode)..........................................................................................5-27

5.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................5-27


5.2.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................5-28
5.2.3 Planning Data ................................................................5-29
5.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................5-30
5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data.......................................................5-31
5.2.6 Configuring Clock ..........................................................5-32
5.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port...............................................5-33
5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-35
5.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-35
5.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................5-37

6 Configuring the Multicast Service .................................................................6-1

6.1 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode ...................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................6-2


6.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................6-2
6.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................6-6
6.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression....6-6
6.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...............................6-7
6.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ........................................6-8
6.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address ......................6-9
6.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..................................6-9
6.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-10
6.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................6-14
6.1.12 Configuration Result ......................................................6-16

6.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the
Controllable Mode........................................................................6-19

6.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................6-19


6.2.2 Network Diagram ...........................................................6-19
6.2.3 Planning Data ................................................................6-20
6.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................6-24
6.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..6-24
6.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................6-25
6.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ......................................6-26
6.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address ....................6-27
6.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN ..........................6-27
6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile .....................................6-28
6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ........................6-29
6.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ...........................6-30
6.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-31
6.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................6-34
6.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................6-35

7 Card Software Upgrade ...............................................................................7-1

7.1 Precautions ...................................................................................7-2

7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-2

7.2.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-2


7.2.2 Planning Data ..................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-4
7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..............................7-4
7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File.........................7-5
7.2.6 Backing up the System Software......................................7-6
7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software ..........7-6
7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card..........................7-7
7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control
Card ................................................................................7-7

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card ................................................................7-8

7.3.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-8


7.3.2 Planning Data ..................................................................7-9
7.3.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-9
7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software.................7-10
7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card.................................7-11
7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface
Card ..............................................................................7-11

7.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-12

7.4.1 Upgrade Rule ................................................................7-12


7.4.2 Planning Data ................................................................7-12
7.4.3 Upgrade Flow ................................................................7-12
7.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card...........7-13
7.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card ............7-13
7.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink
Subcard.........................................................................7-14

8 Configuring Link Aggregation .......................................................................8-1

8.1 Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode......................8-2

8.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-2


8.1.2 Network Diagram .............................................................8-2
8.1.3 Planning Data ..................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................8-5
8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ................................................................................8-5
8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode ...................................8-6
8.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports....................................8-6
8.1.8 Configuration Result ........................................................8-7

8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACP Aggregation Mode...............8-7

8.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-7


8.2.2 Network Diagram .............................................................8-8
8.2.3 Planning Data ..................................................................8-9
8.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................8-10
8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ..............................................................................8-11
8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ............................8-12
8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ..........................8-13
8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode .................................8-13
8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports..................................8-14
8.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................8-15

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring......................................9-1

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring...............................................9-2

9.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................9-2


9.1.2 Planning Data ..................................................................9-4
9.1.3 Configuration Flow...........................................................9-7
9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile .....................................9-7
9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile ...........................................9-8
9.1.6 Configuration End ............................................................9-9

9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters ......................9-9

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-11

9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12

9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-12

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card...................9-13

9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card ................................9-14

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card .............................9-15

10 Test Function .............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test ........................................................10-2

10.1.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-2


10.1.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-3
10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test..................10-3
10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ..........10-4
10.1.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-4

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test.......................................................10-5

10.2.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-5


10.2.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-5
10.2.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-6
10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ................10-6
10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .........10-7
10.2.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-8

10.3 Ping Test .....................................................................................10-9

10.3.1 Test Purpose .................................................................10-9


10.3.2 Ping Test .......................................................................10-9
10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result................................................ 10-11

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide .............................................................. A-1

A.1 Function Overview ........................................................................ A-1

A.2 Procedure..................................................................................... A-1


Figures

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram....................................................1-8


Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel ......1-12
Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment.......................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-4
Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed ..............................................2-5
Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-6
Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed ..............................................2-7
Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection .....................................2-8
Figure 2-7 The Subrack View..........................................................................2-8
Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)...............................................2-9
Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually ................................................................2-10
Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-11
Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-12
Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time .........................................................2-13
Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-14
Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service ................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service...........................................................3-9
Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-10
Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-11
Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-12
Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-12
Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters ......3-13
Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IP Address .................................................3-14
Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-14
Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ..........................................3-15
Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-16
Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ..........................................3-17
Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IP Address Status..........................................3-18
Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-18
Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-19
Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service ..................................3-21
Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service ............................................................3-28
Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-29
Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-30
Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-31
Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-32
Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server...........................................................3-32
Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IP Address .................................................3-33
Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-34
Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .......................................................3-35
Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-35
Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ..........................................3-36
Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IP Address Status..........................................3-37
Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-38
Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-39
Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services .................................................3-41
Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service ......................................3-46
Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name................................................3-47
Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..................................3-48
Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data ................................................................3-48
Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data.....................................................................3-49
Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data.........................................................3-50
Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data.................................................................3-50
Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..........3-51
Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side) ...3-52
Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data..................................................3-53
Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..................................3-53
Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock ........................................................................3-54
Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data..............................................3-55
Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..........3-56
Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side) ....3-57
Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status .....................................................................3-58
Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status .................................................................3-58
Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters......................................3-59
Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer .........................................................3-60
Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile .........................................................3-61
Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters ........................................................3-61
Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number ......................................3-62
Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number.........................................................3-63
Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.....................3-64
Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833 .........................................................................3-64
Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication .........................................3-65
Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters ......3-66
Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ........................................3-66
Figure 3-60 SIP Advanced Configuration ........................................................3-67
Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ............................................3-68
Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-69
Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users...................................3-69
Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ..................3-70
Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ..........................................3-71
Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port.................3-72
Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information...................................3-73
Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode........................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode...4-11
Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-12
Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-13
Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-14
Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).........................4-14
Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-15
Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Transparent Transmission Mode .........................................4-16
Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................4-17
Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-18
Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................4-18
Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-19
Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-20
Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-21
Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-22
Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................4-23
Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)..................................................4-23
Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-25
Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode ......4-27
Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-35
Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-37
Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode (Completed)...........................................................4-37
Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode (Completed).................................................................4-40
Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Tag Mode ...........................................................................4-41
Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-42
Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-43
Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-44
Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode4-45
Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode .....4-46
Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed).................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ...........................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-49
Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-57
Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-58
Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-59
Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in
the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed)..........................................4-60
Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-61
Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-62
Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-63
Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-63
Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode ............................4-64
Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-65
Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-66
Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-67
Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-68
Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-70
Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-76
Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-77
Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-78
Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL
Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed) .........................4-79
Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-80
Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-81
Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-82
Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-83
Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-84
Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-85
Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode .............................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode5-10
Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-11
Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-12
Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode (Completed)....................................................5-13
Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL
Service Configuration...................................................................5-14
Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode
(Completed).................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-15
Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-16
Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................5-17
Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Completed) ......................5-17
Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-18
Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-19
Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).................5-20
Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-21
Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-22
Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).5-22
Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ........5-23
Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-24
Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................5-25
Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-26
Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ..........................................5-27
Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-31
Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-32
Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................5-33
Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-34
Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................5-34
Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode..........................................5-35
Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-36
Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-37
Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode .................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode ............................................6-6
Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..................6-7
Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................................6-7
Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode...............................................6-8
Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode........6-9
Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..............................................6-10
Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode ...............6-11
Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-12
Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner....................6-15
Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed ...................6-15
Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information .................................6-16
Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode ...........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode......6-20
Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode ...................................6-24
Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression................6-25
Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................6-26
Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode.................................6-26
Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Controllable
Mode ...........................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode .......6-28
Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile ...................................................6-29
Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ......................................6-30
Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters .........................................6-30
Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode ......................................6-31
Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-32
Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable
Mode ...........................................................................................6-33
Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable
Mode ...........................................................................................6-34
Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)..........................................6-35
Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal
User ............................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview
User ............................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the
Controllable Mode........................................................................6-37
Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode ...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable
Mode ...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card ..........................7-4
Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash ..........................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data.....................................7-6
Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software....................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-7
Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card........................................7-7
Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card....7-8
Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software ............7-10
Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch
Manner........................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card...............................................7-11
Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card ..........7-11
Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.............7-13
Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-13
Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-14
Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard.....7-14
Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram ...........................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation ........................................8-5
Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -
Manual Aggregation.......................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation .....................8-6
Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation......................8-7
Figure 8-6 Static LACP Aggregation Network Diagram ....................................8-8
Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation ............................8-11
Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -
Static LACP Aggregation..............................................................8-12
Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ..........................................8-12
Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ........................................8-13
Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACP Aggregation ............8-14
Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACP Aggregation.............8-14
Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance............................9-7
Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ..............9-8
Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ....................9-8
Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters..........................9-11
Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-12
Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12
Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-13
Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card .....................9-14
Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card................................9-14
Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card................................9-15
Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test............................10-2
Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-3
Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-4
Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ........................10-4
Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test...........................10-5
Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test...........................................10-6
Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ..............................10-7
Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .......................10-8
Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters ........................................10-10
Figure 10-10 Ping Test ................................................................................... 10-11
Figure A-1 Opening the WFTP Software......................................................... A-1
Figure A-2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI .......................................... A-2
Figure A-3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1 ................. A-2
Figure A-4 Entering User Password 1............................................................. A-3
Figure A-5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package........... A-3
Figure A-6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool................................... A-4
Figure A-7 Logging Options ........................................................................... A-4
Tables

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management


Channel.........................................................................................1-8
Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment......................................2-9
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service .....................................3-3
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service .......................................3-21
Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1
Side.............................................................................................3-42
Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side3-44
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode .............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode....................4-27
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-50
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ...........................................................................................4-71
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode........................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ...........................................................................................5-29
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode.....................6-3
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode............6-20
Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card ...........7-3
Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type .......7-8
Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software .....7-9
Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA
Card ............................................................................................7-12
Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode...................................8-4
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACP Aggregation Mode............................8-9
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold
Parameters and Alarm Clearing Threshold Parameters ..................9-2
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Instance ........................................................................................9-4
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Parameters....................................................................................9-9
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters.................................................................10-10
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result......................................................................... 10-11
1 Configuring the UNM2000
Management Channel

Before using the UNM2000 to manage the AN5006-20, users need to configure the
UNM2000 management channel via the Console control platform (abbreviated as
Console in the following). The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000
management channel.

Logging into the Console

Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Logging into the UNM2000

Version: B/1 1-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

1.1 Logging into the Console

The following introduces how to log into the Console.

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console

Log into the Console through the Window’s Hyper Terminal to access the CLI
network management system for the equipment.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The user name and password for logging in the CLI network management
system for the AN5006-20 are available.

Procedure

1. Click the Start menu on the desktop, and select All ProgramsíAccessories
íTelecomíHyper Terminal to bring up the Connection Description dialog
box.

Note:

The Windows XP operating system is used as an example here.

2. In the Connection Description dialog box, configure the parameters as


follows:

4 Name: Fill in the name of a connection object, e.g. FiberHome CLI


Control Terminal.

4 Icon: Select an icon for this connection.

1-2 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Click OK, and the Connect To dialog box appears.

3. Select the COM1 port of the Console interface on the management control card
in the drop-down list of the Connect using field in the Connect To dialog box.

Click OK, and the COM1 Properties dialog box appears.

4. In the COM1 Properties dialog box, click the Restore Defaults button. The
default configurations are as below:

4 Bits per second: 9600

4 Data bits: 8

4 Parity: None

4 Stop bits: 1

Version: B/1 1-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4 Flow control: None

Click OK to start up the Console.

5. Press the <ENTER> key, and enter the user name and the password to log into
the CLI network management system. The commands are as follows:
Login:GEPON
// The default user is common user, and the user name is GEPON.
Password:*****
// The initial password is GEPON.
User>enable

1-4 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

// In the read-only mode, use the enable command to enter the management mode.
Password:*****
// The initial password of the administrator account is GEPON.
Admin#
// After the prompt Admin⇤appears, you can enter command lines to perform network management
operations on the AN5006-20.

Note:

u If the command prompt is User>, the system is in the common user


mode; if the command prompt is Admin#, the system is in the
administrator mode.

u The user name is case insensitive, while the password should be


capitalized.

Caution:

To enhance the security of the system, users should memorize their


passwords and keep them secret. Regularly changing passwords is
strongly recommended.

6. Select FileíSave from the menu bar of the Console window to save the
configurations for the Console.

1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console

After establishing the Console for the AN5006-20 CLI network management system
in their first login, users can directly access the Console via the CLI network
management system the next time.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

Version: B/1 1-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u The Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system has been
set up (the following takes the FiberHome CLI Control Terminal as an
example).

Procedure

1. Select StartíProgramíAccessoriesíTelecomíHyperTerminalí
FiberHome CLI Control Terminal from the desktop to bring up the Telnet
default? alert box.

4 Click Yes, the Hyper Terminal will be used as the default Telnet program;

4 Click No, the Hyper Terminal will not be used as the default Telnet
program.

Enter the established Console.

Note:

To set up a shortcut for convenience, drag and drop FiberHome CLI


Control Terminal to the desktop.

1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management


Channel

The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000 management channel.

1.2.1 Configuration Rules

The rules for configuring the UNM2000 management channel are described as
follows:

u The MCUA card is required for the equipment to perform the MSAN uplink.

u The equipment can support up to four management VLANs, thus the user can
manage the equipment even in a complex network.

1-6 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

u When configuring the UNM2000 management channel, if the IP address of the


UNM2000 client end and the equipment management IP address are not in the
same network segment, users should configure the static routing to perform
routing and forwarding.

u While configuring the static routing, users need to configure the IP address and
mask of the destination network segment and the gateway address of the next-
hop routing.

u The management VLAN and IP address are only valid in the equipment CPU.
Users need to configure the corresponding uplink service VLAN for the
management port.

u If the VLAN tag processing mode is set to untag, the port default VLAN should
be configured.

u QinQ management VLANs are supported to provide users with double-layer


management channels.

1.2.2 Network Diagram

The UNM2000 client end manages the equipment via the equipment’s uplink ports.
The management is implemented in two ways: management based on LAN and
management via gateway. In this example, the client end performs remote
management of the AN5006-20 via the network gateway, and the AN5006-20 uses
the MCUA card. See Figure 1-1 for the network diagram of the UNM2000.

Version: B/1 1-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram

1.2.3 Planning Data

Table 1-1 lists the planning data for configuring the UNM2000 management
channel for the AN5006-20.

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

Designate the service name


for the current configuration
manage vlan ipv4 Management VLAN item. Set the value to a
mngvlan
name <vlanname> name character string that contains
no more than 16 bytes.
Configuring the
Compulsory.
Management VLAN
The protocol type in the outer
or single VLAN tag. The
svlan tpid SVLAN Tag protocol
default setting is 33024 33024
<tpid> identifier
(0x8100).
This parameter is compulsory.

1-8 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

The priority of the outer or


single VLAN tag. The value
cos <cos> SVLAN priority 7
ranges from 0 to 7.
Compulsory.

The VLAN ID of the outer or


single VLAN tag. The value
vid <value> SVLAN ID 1
ranges from 1 to 4095.
This parameter is compulsory.

The protocol type in the inner


VLAN tag. The default setting
CVLAN Tag protocol is 33024 (0x8100).
-
identifier Optional. Configured when the
management VLAN is double-
tagged.

The priority of the inner VLAN


tag. The value ranges from 0
{[cvlan] tpid to 7.
CVLAN priority -
<tpid> cos <cos> Compulsory. Configure this
vid <value>}*1 item when the management
VLAN is double-tagged.

The VLAN ID of the inner


VLAN tag. The value ranges
from 1 to 4095.
CVLAN ID -
Compulsory. Configure this
item when the management
VLAN is double-tagged.

The valid IPv4 address in


Management IP 10.98.20.
ip <A.B.C.D> dotted decimal notation.
address 20
Compulsory.

The valid IPv4 address in


Management IP 255.255.0.
mask <A.B.C.D> dotted decimal notation.
mask 0
Compulsory.

In the same network segment


{[gateway] <A.B. with an existed IP address of
Default gateway -
C.D>}*1 the equipment.
Optional.

Version: B/1 1-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

It is valid when the OLT


{[pontype] [pon| Identifying the uplink delivers the management
-
dpon]}*1 PON port type VLAN to the AN5006-20.
Optional.

Optional. The system


uplink vlan {id Uplink VLAN service automatically assigns the ID
-
<id>}*1 ID when the parameter is not
configured.

Designate the service name


for the current configuration
Uplink VLAN service item. Set the value to a
<name> mngvlan
Adding the uplink name character string that contains
service VLAN no more than 30 bytes.
Compulsory.

The starting ID value of the


start <startVid> Starting VLAN ID management VLAN 1
Compulsory.

The ending ID value of the


end <endVid> Ending VLAN ID management VLAN 1
Compulsory.

1-10 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

The mode of processing the


VLAN tag. Defines whether to
strip the VLAN tag from the
control message transmitted
from the management control
card port. The options include
tag and untag.
u Select the untag mode
when no other equipment
which can strip the VLAN
The tag processing tag exists between the PC
[tag|untag] tag
mode and the AN5006-20 (for
example, when the PC is
directly connected with
the equipment or via the
HUB).
u Select the tag mode when
any other equipment
which can strip the VLAN
tag exist between the PC
and the AN5006-20.
Compulsory.

The options include port


[portno| Uplink VLAN (general port) and trunk (link
portno
trunkid] associated port type aggregation group).
Compulsory.

The port number ranges from


1 to 4, and the link aggregation
group number should be set to
1.
This parameter can be typed
in one of the three forms as
Port number or link
below:
<ifStr> aggregation group 5/1
u A single port: portno 5/1;
number
u Multiple ports: portno 5/
1,3;
u Port range: portno 5/1-3.
5 indicates the slot number of
the management control card.
This parameter is compulsory.

Version: B/1 1-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example

The IP address of network


containing the network
add static route
Destination network management server. The valid 10.78.20.
ipv4 destination
IP address IPv4 address in dotted decimal 122
<A.B.C.D>
notation.
Compulsory.

The gateway IP address of the


network segment where the
Configuring the static gateway <A.B.C. equipment is located. The 10.98.1.
Gateway IP Address
routing D> valid IPv4 address in dotted 254
decimal notation.
Compulsory.

The gateway subnet mask of


the segment where the
Gateway subnet equipment is located. The 255.255.0.
mask <A.B.C.D>
mask valid IPv4 address in dotted 0
decimal notation.
Compulsory.

1.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the UNM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1-12 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN

Command Format
Command
cd vlan
add manage vlan ipv4 name <vlanname> svlan tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>
{[cvlan] tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>}*1 ip <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>
{[gateway] <A.B.C.D>}*1 {[pontype] [pon/dpon]}*1

Configuration Procedure

1. Access the vlan directory.


Admin#cd vlan
Admin\vlan#

2. Create the management VLAN.


Admin\vlan#add manage vlan ipv4 name mngvlan svlan tpid 33024 cos 7 vid 1 ip
10.98.20.20 mask 255.255.0.0
Admin\vlan#

1.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN

Command Format
Command
add uplink vlan {id <id>}*1 <name> start <startVid> end <endVid> [tag|
untag] [portno|trunk] <port>

Configuration Procedure

1. Add the uplink service VLAN.


Admin\vlan#add uplink vlan mngvlan start 1 end 1 tag portno 5/1
Admin\vlan#

1.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing

Command Format
Command
cd ..
cd device

Version: B/1 1-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Command
add static route ipv4 designated <A.B.C.D> gateway <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>
save

Configuration Procedure

1. Switch the vlan directory to the device directory.


Admin\vlan#cd ..
Admin#cd device
Admin\device#

2. Configure the static routings.


Admin\device#add static route ipv4 designated 10.78.20.122 gateway 10.98.1.254 mask
255.255.0.0
Admin\device#

3. Save configuration.
Admin\device#cd ..
Admin\#save
Save Config ... OK.
Admin\#

1.2.8 Configuration Result

The configuration of the UNM2000 management channel is completed after the


aforesaid steps. Users can manage and maintain the AN5006-20 by logging into the
UNM2000 on the network management computer.

1.3 Logging into the UNM2000


Prerequisites

u JRE1.6.0 has been installed.

u The server end is running normally.

u The communication between the server end and client end is normal.

Procedure

1. Double-click the browser icon, enter http://server end IP address:port


number/webstart/ (for example, http://10.98.20.53:8080/webstart/) in the

1-14 Version: B/1


1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

address field of the browser, and press Enter to access the page for installing
the UNM2000 client end.

Note:

The port number refers to the Tomcat access port number that users set
when installing the server end.

2. Click UNM2000 client end to bring up the alert box as shown below to perform
download validation and installation of the client end software.

3. Enter the username and password (both are admin by default) in the Log into
UNM2000 dialog box that appears. Fill in the IP address of the corresponding
server in Server and click Log in.

Version: B/1 1-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Note:
If you log in the UNM2000 successfully, the server end and client end
have both been installed correctly.

1-16 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

After logging into the UNM2000, users need to add the to-be-managed AN5006-20
to a logical domain so as to manage and maintain it. The following introduces the
steps for adding equipment.

Configuration Rules

Configuration Flow

Creating the Logical Domain

Creating the Access NE

Adding Cards

Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

Configuring the SNMP Time System

Synchronizing Time

Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Version: B/1 2-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2.1 Configuration Rules

u If the LAN network management mode is used, the IP address of the system
should be consistent with the equipment IP address set for the in-band
management VLAN, so that the network management server can communicate
normally with the AN5006-20. For example, if the equipment IP address set for
the management VLAN is 10.98.20.20, the IP address of the system should
also be set to 10.98.20.20.

u When the network management computer and the equipment are not in the
same LAN, users need to manage the equipment through a gateway. In such
case, the IP address of the system and the gateway IP address of the
equipment set for the management VLAN should be in the same network
segment, so that the network management computer can access and manage
the AN5006-20 through the gateway. For example, if the gateway IP address of
the equipment set in the management VLAN is 10.98.x.x (the subnet mask is
255.255.0.0), the IP address of the system should also be set to 10.98.x.x (the
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, and must be different from the IP address of the
gateway).

2.2 Configuration Flow

See Figure 2-1 for the flow of adding equipment.

2-2 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment

2.3 Creating the Logical Domain

Divide the management objects by creating the corresponding logical domains


according to the requirements of the operators to enable management based on
authorization and domain.

Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area of the Main Topology pane and select Create Logical
Domain from the shortcut menu to bring up the Create Global Logical
Domain dialog box.

Version: B/1 2-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain

2. Enter the desired name in the Logical Domain Name field. Alias Name and
Remark are optional items.

3. Click OK to save the settings and create a new logical domain.

2-4 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed

2.4 Creating the Access NE

Add the AN5006-20 module to the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the created logical domain and select Create NEíCreate access
NE... from the shortcut menu.

2. Configure the parameters in the Create Access NE dialog box. See Figure 2-4.

Version: B/1 2-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE

3. Click OK and the newly created access NE will appear in the main topology, as
illustrated in Figure 2-5.

2-6 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed

2.5 Adding Cards

Two ways of adding a card exist: automatic adding and manual adding.

u Automatic adding: You can use the function of detecting physical configuration
to add a card automatically if it is present.

u Manual adding: Users can pre-configure to add a card if it is not present. The
manual adding is also available if the card is present.

2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The cards can be automatically added to the slots through automatic detection of
the current physical configuration of the AN5006-20.

Version: B/1 2-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Right-click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane and select


Detect Physical Configuration from the shortcut menu to open the Detect
Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the desired synchronization mode.

3. Click the Detect Physical Configuration (D) button and wait until the detection
is completed, as shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection

4. Click the Synchronize All button and click OK when the Synchronize
Operation Succeed. message appears to complete adding the card
automatically.

5. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology pane to open the NE manager and
check the current card configuration, as shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 The Subrack View

2-8 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually

Slot Distribution

After adding the AN5006-20 module, click this module in the Device Tree. and its
subrack view will appear in the right pane, as shown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)

The cards that can be configured in the AN5006-20 subrack view are listed in
Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment

Card Name Applicable Slot Quantity

AD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD64 1 to 4 0 to 4
CASA 1 to 4 0 to 4
VD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS32 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8A 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8B 1 to 4 0 to 4
HD32A 1 to 4 0 to 4
MCUA / MCUB 5 1
PWRB 6 1
FANB 7 1
HCU-20 801 0 to 1

Version: B/1 2-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

Add the AD64 card in Slot 1 manually in the subrack view. See below for the
operation procedures:

1. Right-click the slot to be added with a card, and select Add Card from the
shortcut menu. Then select the desired card type from the submenu that
appears subsequently.

Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually

Modifying Cards

u Right-click the card to be modified in the subrack view, and select Attribute
from the shortcut menu that appears. Then modify the card attributes in the
dialog box that appears.

u Right-click the card to be deleted in the subrack view, and select Delete Card
from the shortcut menu. The card will then be deleted.

u Right-click the card to be replaced in the subrack view, and select Replace
Card from the shortcut menu. Then select the new card type in the submenu.
After replacing the card, reconfigure parameters for the new card or use the
system default configurations.

2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver


Address

Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address, and then the system will send the Trap
message to the address.

2-10 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common ConfigíSNMP TRAP Receiver IP from the Operational


Tree pane to bring up the SNMP TRAP Receiver IP tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box
that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an SNMP TRAP receiver address.

5. Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address (the IP address of the network
management server in use), UDP port number, community name and SNMP
version.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System

Configure the SNMP time system, including the interval for time synchronization and
the IP address of the network management system server.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common ConfigíTime ConfigíTime Management from the


Operational Tree, and select the Snmp System Time Config tab.

4. Configure the EMS synchronization interval and the IP address of the EMS
server.

Version: B/1 2-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System

2.8 Synchronizing Time

System time synchronization aims to synchronize the network management server


with the equipment in time and check whether the communication between them is
smooth.

Note:

After being connected to the network management server, the equipment


will apply to the server for time synchronization. When connected to
multiple network management servers, the equipment will apply to the
first server connected to it for time synchronization. To choose another
network management server for time synchronization of the equipment,
users can reconfigure the SNMP time system.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíTime Calibration to


bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-12.

2-12 Version: B/1


2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time

4. Click OK to start executing the time synchronization command.

5. After the time calibration is completed successfully, click the Close button.

2.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

To prevent loss of equipment configuration data subsequent to power failure, it is


recommended that users should take this operation after they have completed
service provisioning and function configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Version: B/1 2-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

2-14 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

The following introduces how to start up the voice services for the AN5006-20.

Note:

The PSTN voice service is supported by the MCUA card only; while the
NGN voice service is supported by the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-
EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and MCU-GPON2 card.

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP

Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

Common Configuration

MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

SIP Configuration

Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

Version: B/1 3-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -


H.248

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the H.248 protocol.

3.1.1 Configuration Rules

u When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to the H.248 protocol for VoIP
services, and set the protocol port No. to 2944.

u The POTS card provides 64 interfaces; the CASA / POTS32 card provides 32
interfaces.

u When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name,
please note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the
variable part - the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part
must be smaller than 6000.

3.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the
H.248 protocol.

3-2 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Network Diagram

Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service

The H.248 protocol separates the signaling from the RTP flow to access the users'
voice services. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS
cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.

3.1.3 Planning Data

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the actual


Slot No. 4
situations.
Configure this item according to the actual
Enabling the Port No. 1 to 64
situations.
POTS port
When the voice service is configured, this
Enable item must be set to Enable. Otherwise the Enable
service cannot be accessed.

Version: B/1 3-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Service ID Read-only item. 1


The user can enter numbers, letters and
Service Name underlines not exceeding 30 characters for ngn
the subscriber service name.
The starting VLAN ID of the service. Value
range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and
Starting VLAN ID 200
4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

Configuring The ending VLAN ID of the service. Value


the uplink range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and
Ending VLAN ID 200
service VLAN 4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the service or the Trunk


group number.
Port No. / Trunk Group
If the uplink port has joined the Trunk group, GE1
ID
the system only displays the Trunk group
number, instead of the uplink port number.

untag indicates stripping the VLAN tag; tag


Port Tag / Untag tag
indicates keeping the VLAN tag.

Read-only. The options include signal vlan


and RTP vlan. The signal vlan refers to the
VoIP Vlan Type VLAN tag carried by the voice signaling signal vlan RTP vlan
flow, while the RTP vlan refers to the VLAN
tag carried by the voice flow.

Service NAME Unconfigurable. Null by default currently. -

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to


Svlan Tpid 33024
Configuring 65534. The default setting is 33024.
the voice The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or the
VLAN VLAN ID in the single-tagged mode. The
Svlan Id VLAN ID should be within the uplink port 200
VLAN range. The value ranges from 1 to
4085, and should not be null.
The service VLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest
Svlan CoS 7
priority level and 0 the lowest. The default
value is 7.

3-4 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to


65534. The default setting is 33024. Users
Cvlan Tpid 33024
need not configure this item when single
VLAN is used.
The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode. Users
Cvlan Id need not configure this item in the single- 10 20
VLAN mode.
The user VLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority
Cvlan CoS while 0 is the lowest. The default setting is 7. 7
Users need not configure this item when
single VLAN is used.

The IP address or domain name of the


Primary MGC 192.168.1.1
primary softswitch platform MGC.

The communication port of the primary


softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges
Primary MGC Port 2944
from 0 to 65535, and the default value is
2944.
The IP address or domain name of the
Secondary MGC 192.168.2.1
secondary softswitch platform MGC.

The communication port of the secondary


softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges
Secondary MGC Port 2944
Configuring from 0 to 65535, and the default value is
Megaco / 2944.
MGCP Controls whether the ONU regularly sends
softswitch keep-alive messages to the softswitch
Keep Alive Enable Initiative
platform platform MGC. Options available are Enable
parameters Initiative, Enable Passive and Disable.
The interval of sending the keep-alive
Alive Interval (s) messages. The value ranges from 1 to 30
86400 (unit: s), and the default value is 30.

The maximum timeout times that the


softswitch platform MGC permits the ONU to
send the keep-alive messages; if the value
Alive Times is exceeded, it is considered that the MGC 3
loses its communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The default
setting is 3.

Version: B/1 3-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The options include Notify and Service


Alive Format Notify
Change.

IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static


The IP address and the subnet mask of the
management control card's CPU. The IP IPv4:192.168.1.101 /
Signal IP
address is used to communicate with the 255.255.255.0
MGC.
The address of the signaling gateway, used
Signal Gateway IPv4:192.168.1.254
to forward the data of the MGC.
The IP address and the subnet mask of the IPv4:192.168.2.101/
RTP IP
management control card's DSP 255.255.255.0

The address of the RTP gateway. This


RTP Gateway gateway is used to forward the RTP flow IPv4:192.168.2.254
communicating with other MGs.

The IP address of the primary domain name


system. Users need configure the DNS only
when the domain name is used as the MGC
Primary DNS -
address. In this example, IP address is used
as the MGC address, so you need not
Configuring configure the DNS.
the voice IP
The IP address of the secondary domain
address
name system. Users need configure the
DNS only when the domain name is used as
Second DNS -
the MGC address. In this example, IP
address is used as the MGC address, so
you need not configure the DNS.

Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The options


PPPoE Operation include dial and disconnect. The default -
value is disconnect.
PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -

The authentication mode of the PPPoE. The


PPPoE Authentication options include PAP and CHAP. The default -
setting is PAP.

DHCP Operation Enables or disables the DHCP function. -


Enables or disables the DHCP Option60
DHCP Option60 Enable function, and controls whether to add the -
terminal identifier.

3-6 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The fixed part of the Option60 terminal


DHCP Option60 Base -
identifier.
The suffix value of the Option60 terminal
DHCP Option60 Suffix -
identifier.
The domain name of the gateway. The
default setting is null; configured according
to actual conditions. If the Softswitch
platform requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply for a
Domain Name domain name for the equipment from the -
Softswitch center.
When the domain name is null, the system
will use the following as domain name by
Configuring
default: voice signaling IP address: local
basic voice
protocol port number.
parameters
The communication port of the softswitch
Local Protocol Port platform MGC. The value ranges from 0 to 2944
65534, and the default value is 0.
Select the text encoding type (compact
Protocol Encode Type encode or uncompact encode). The uncompact encode
default value is uncompact encode.

Select the transmission layer protocol (TCP


Transport Protocol Type UDP
or UDP). The default value is UDP.

The fixed part of the RTP resource name. If


the RTP resource name is RTP/1000, the
RTP Name Fixed Part RTP/
fixed part should be RTP/. The default value
is RTP/.
The start value of the variable part of the
RTP resource name; the start value must be
Configuring RTP Name Begin Value smaller than the end value. The value 4000
the RTP ranges from 0 to 65534, and the default
resource value is 4000.
profile The end value of the variable part of RTP
name. It must be larger than the start value
RTP Name End Value 9000
of the variable part. The value ranges from 0
to 65534, and the default value is 9000.
The step of the variable part of RTP
RTP Name Step Value resource name. The value ranges from 1 to 1
65534, and the default value is 1.

Version: B/1 3-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select whether to pad the bits following the


fixed part (RTP/) with zeros automatically to
RTP Name Fill fill the tetrad, for example, to pad RTP/0 to filled
RTP/0000. Configure according to the
actual condition. The default value: filled.
The number of the slot accommodating the
Slot No. 4
POTS card.
The POTS card port physically connected
Port No. 1 to 64
Configuring with the subscriber's phone.
the voice port The Termination ID corresponds to the port
PHONE B1 to B64
for identifying the physical end point.

Configure the DSP profile to be bound with


DSP Profile ID Default
the port. The default value is Default.

3.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the H.248 protocol is
shown in Figure 3-2.

3-8 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service

3.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 3-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-4.

3-10 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-5.

Version: B/1 3-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.

u When configuring the voice VLAN, make sure the service name here is
consistent with the service name in the uplink port VLAN configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to


open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3-12 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform


Parameters

Configure the IP address of the MGC and the protocol port number of the NGN.

When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to H.248 for VoIP services, and the
protocol port No. to 2944.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP


ConfigíMegaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config to bring up the Megaco/MGCP
SoftSwitch Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters

3.1.9 Configuring the Voice IP Address

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 3-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open


the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IP Address

3.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 2944, and the protocol encoding type to uncompacted
encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to


open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3-14 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

Configure the parameters relating to the RTP resource profile, especially, set the
value in the RTP flow packet header in the H.248 protocol.

When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, please
note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the variable part
- the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part must be smaller
than 6000.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP


ConfigíMegaco RTP Config Profile to bring up the Megaco RTP Config
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

3.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Version: B/1 3-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to


open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port

3.1.13 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the H.248 protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.

3.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the current ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

3-16 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

3.1.15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Version: B/1 3-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IP Address Status

3.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

3-18 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal


conversation.

3.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

Version: B/1 3-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -


SIP

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the SIP protocol.

3.2.1 Configuration Rules

u When the softswitch platform uses the SIP protocol to control the access
terminal, select the protocol port 5060.

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP
authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID
can be edited only when the SIP protocol is used in the system.

3.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the SIP.

3-20 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Network Diagram

Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service

The protocol SIP implements the voice services of users with the signaling and RTP
flow separated. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS
cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.

3.2.3 Planning Data

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Slot No. 4
actual situations.
Configure this item according to the
Port No. 1 to 64
Enabling the actual situations.
POTS port When the voice service is configured,
this item must be set to Enable.
Enable Enable
Otherwise the service cannot be
provisioned.

Configuring
the uplink Service ID Read-only item. 1
service VLAN

Version: B/1 3-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The user can enter numbers, letters


and underlines not exceeding 30
Service Name ngn
characters for the subscriber service
name.
The starting VLAN ID of the service.
Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
Starting VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting 600
VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The ending VLAN ID of the service.


Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
Ending VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting 600
VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the service or the


Trunk group number.
If the uplink port has joined the Trunk
Port No. / Trunk Group ID GE1
group, the system only displays the
Trunk group number, instead of the
uplink port number.

Untag indicates stripping the VLAN


Port Tag / Untag tag; tag indicates keeping the VLAN tag
tag.

Read-only. The options include signal


vlan and RTP vlan. The signal vlan
refers to the VLAN tag carried by the
VoIP VLAN Type signal vlan RTP vlan
voice signaling flow, while the RTP
Configuring vlan refers to the VLAN tag carried by
the voice the voice flow.
VLAN Unconfigurable. Null by default
Service NAME -
currently.

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1


Svlan Tpid to 65534. The default setting is 33024
33024.

3-22 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or


the VLAN ID in the single-tagged
mode. The VLAN ID should be within
Svlan Id 600
the uplink port VLAN range. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095, and should not
be null.
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for
Svlan CoS 7
the highest priority level and 0 the
lowest. The default value is 7.
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is
Cvlan Tpid 33024
33024. Users need not configure this
item when single VLAN is used.

The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode.


Cvlan Id Users need not configure this item in 60 70
the single-VLAN mode.

The user VLAN priority level. The


value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the
highest priority while 0 is the lowest.
Cvlan CoS 7
The default setting is 7. Users need
not configure this item when single
VLAN is used.
The IP address or domain name of
SipProxySerAddr 192.168.5.101
the active SIP proxy server.

The port number of the active SIP


SipProxyPort proxy server. The default setting is 5060
5060.
The IP address or domain name of
BackupSipProxySer- the standby SIP proxy server.
192.168.6.101
Configuring vAddr Configure this item according to the
the SIP server planning data.

The port number of the standby SIP


BackupSipProxyPort proxy server. The default setting is 5060
5060.
The IP address or domain name of
SipRegisterAddr 192.168.5.101
the active SIP registrar.

The port number of the active SIP


SipRegisterPort 5060
registrar. The default setting is 5060.

Version: B/1 3-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The IP address or domain name of


BackupSipRegisterAddr 192.168.6.101
the standby SIP registrar.

The port number of the standby SIP


BackupSipRegisterPort 5060
registrar. The default setting is 5060.

After being registered on the SIP


server, an ONU needs to send the
register messages to the SIP server
periodically. That is, in the register
refresh period, the ONU needs to
Sip Register Interval (s) send the register information to the 3600
SIP server to keep the validity of its
registration on the SIP server.
The value ranges from 60 to 3600; the
unit is second; and the default value is
3600.
Controls whether the ONU regularly
sends keep-alive messages to the
Keep Alive softswitch platform MGC. Options Initiative
available are Initiative, Passive and
Disable.
The interval of sending the keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1
Alive Interval (s) 30
to 43200 (unit: s), and the default
value is 30.
The maximum timeout times that the
softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
Alive Times 3
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.

The options include By Device and


Alive Mode By Device
By Port.

IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static


Configuring The IP address and the subnet mask
the voice IP of the management control card's IPv4:192.168.1.101 /
Signal IP
address CPU. The IP address is used to 255.255.255.0
communicate with the MGC.

3-24 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The address of the signaling gateway,


Signal Gateway IPv4:192.168.1.254
used to forward the data of the MGC.
The IP address of the management IPv4:192.168.2.101 /
RTP IP
control card's DSP. 255.255.255.0
The address of the RTP gateway.
This gateway is used to forward the
RTP Gateway IPv4:192.168.2.254
RTP flow communicating with other
MGs.
The IP address of the primary domain
name system. The DNS needs
configuration only when the MGC
Primary DNS configuration uses the domain name. -
In this example, IP address is used as
the MGC address, so you need not
configure the DNS.

The IP address of the secondary


domain name system. Users need
configure the DNS only when the
Second DNS domain name is used as the MGC -
address. In this example, IP address
is used as the MGC address, so you
need not configure the DNS.

Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The


PPPoE Operation options include dial and disconnect. -
The default value is disconnect.
PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -

PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -

The authentication mode of the


PPPoE Authentication PPPoE. The options include PAP and -
CHAP. The default setting is PAP.

Enables or disables the DHCP


DHCP Operation -
function.
Enables or disables the DHCP
DHCP Option60 Enable Option60 function, and controls -
whether to add the terminal identifier.
The fixed part of the Option60
DHCP Option60 Base -
terminal identifier.
The suffix value of the Option60
DHCP Option60 Suffix -
terminal identifier.

Version: B/1 3-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The domain name of the gateway.


The default setting is null; configured
according to actual conditions. If the
Softswitch platform requires
registration in terms of domain name,
the user should apply for a domain
Domain Name name for the equipment from the -
Softswitch center.
When the domain name is null, the
system will use the following as
domain name by default: voice
Configuring signaling IP address: local protocol
basic voice port number.
parameters
The communication port of the
softswitch platform MGC. The value
Local Protocol Port 5060
ranges from 0 to 65534, and the
default value is 0.
Select the text encoding type
(compact encode or uncompact
Protocol Encode Type uncompact encode
encode). The default setting is
uncompact encode.

Select the transmission layer protocol


Transport Protocol Type (TCPor UDP). UDPis selected by UDP
default.
The digitmap is mainly used by the
MG to determine whether all dial-ups
have been collected. The SIP protocol
does not define the digitmap, and
most of the terminals use the method
Configuring
SIP digitmap of dialing # first and then reporting the [0-9ABCD].|[EF][0-9ABCDEF].
SIP digitmap
number. The configuration of the
digitmap can omit the step of dialing
#.
Configure this item according to the
practical project requirements.

The number of the slot


Slot No. 4
accommodating the POTS card.
Configuring
The POTS card port physically
the voice port
Port No. connected with the subscriber's 1 to 64
phone.

3-26 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The actual telephone number of a


PHONE certain port on the ONU. Its value 88881101 to 88881164
must be unique.

The name of the DSP profile bound


DSP Profile ID with the SIP user telephone number. Default
The default setting is Default.

The user name for authenticating a


certain port of the ONU on the SIP
SIPUSER register sever. When the protocol type 88881101 to 88881164
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.

The password for authenticating a


certain port of the ONU on the SIP
SIPPASSWD register sever. When the protocol type test
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.

Some functions of the ONU will be


SIP User Call Config enabled or disabled based on the
Default
Profile ID profile settings after the ONU is bound
to the profile.

3.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the SIP protocol is shown
in Figure 3-17.

Version: B/1 3-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service

3.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

3-28 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-19.

Version: B/1 3-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-20.

3-30 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.

u When configuring the the VoIP voice service VLAN, make sure the service
VLAN ID is within the range of the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port
VLAN ID is within the range of the OLT local VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to


open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-21.

Version: B/1 3-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server

Configure the related parameters of the SIP server. The SIP server includes the
register server and proxy server.

u As a network logical entity, the proxy server can represent the client end to
forward or respond to a request. That is, it can serves as the client end and the
server at the same time. Its main functions include routing, calling control,
service providing, AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting), and so
on.

u The register server accepts the ONU register request, and then saves and
processes the related information of the ONU register.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP


Server Config to open the SIP Server Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server

3-32 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.9 Configuring the Voice IP Address

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open


the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IP Address

3.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 5060, and the protocol encoding type to compacted encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to


open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

The digitmap is mainly used by the MG to determine whether all dial-ups have been
collected. The SIP protocol does not define the digitmap, and most of the terminals
use the method of dialing # first and then reporting the number. The configuration of
the digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.

After configuring the digitmap of the SIP protocol, when the user dials, the number
should match the dialing scheme in the digitmap and then be reported to the
softswitch platform only when a match is found. The SIP digitmap function is
optional and can be configured when required by the operator.

Note:

Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to practical conditions,


so as to enable quick match of telephone numbers.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP


digitmap to open the SIP digitmap tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-25.

3-34 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

3.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to


open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port

Version: B/1 3-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.2.13 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the SIP protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.

3.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

3-36 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IP Address Status

3.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí


DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Version: B/1 3-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal


conversation.

3.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-30.

3-38 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

The following introduces how to configure the PSTN voice service.

Version: B/1 3-39


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.1 Configuration Rule

The AN5006-20 provides four E1 links in total. Each link provides 32 timeslots: the
timeslot 0 acts as the frame header, the timeslot 16 acts as the signaling timeslot (C
channel), and the others are used for transmitting the PSTN voice service. When a
user goes off-hook and uses the PSTN voice service, the remote node to be
connected (taking AN3300-C1 as an example) distributes one timeslot of E1 as the
voice channel. The voice service can be accessed via the cross-connect between
the timeslot and the user port.

u Only the MCUA card of the AN5006-20 supports the PSTN voice service.

u The AN5006-20 supports up to four POTS or CASA cards. When using four
POTS cards, the can implement access of up to 256 PSTN voice users; when
using four CASA cards, the can implement access of up to 128 PSTN voice
users.

u The communication between the AN5006-20 and the AN3300-C1 requires the
timeslot 16 of at least one E1 link as the C channel. If multiple C channel
switches of E1 links are enabled, the AN5006-20 will select the timeslot 16 of
the first E1 link as the active C channel and the timeslots 16 of other E1 links as
the standby C channel.

For example, the AN5006-20 is connected with the AN3300-C1 via the 2nd and
3rd E1 link and the two E1 links enable the C channel. The AN5006-20 will
select the timeslot 16 of the 2nd E1 link as the active C channel and the
timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link as the standby C channel. If the second E1 link is
faulty, the AN5006-20 will automatically select the timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link
as the active C channel.

u The AN5006-20's active / standby clock configuration can be acquired from the
E1 link of the connected AN3300-C1.

u The AN5006-20's E1 data configuration and C channel configuration should be


consistent with the AN3300-C1.

u The AN5006-20's remote node name is the local node name of the AN3300-C1.
The local node name of the AN5006-20 will be displayed in the node data table
of the AN3300-C1.

3-40 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

u The user ID of the V5 PSTN user data configuration of the AN5006-20 is used
for user identification for the AN3300-C1, and should be consistent with the V5
user data configuration of the AN3300-C1.

3.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 PSTN voice services.

Network Diagram

Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services

The AN5006-20 accesses the users' PSTN voice service data via the POTS
interface card and transmits the data to the management control card for processing.
After that, the data are sent to the AN3300-C1 via the E1 uplink interface of the
management control card, and the AN3300-C1 uplinks the data to the V5 switch, so
that the POTS users can access the PSTN network.

Hardware Configuration

Use the MCUA card as the management control card, and the CASA card, the
POTS32 card and the POTS card as the service cards to access voice services. In
the example given below, one POTS card is used.

Version: B/1 3-41


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.3 Planning Data

In the example, the AN3300-C1 is uplinked to the V5 switch via the 1st to 4th E1
links and downlinked to one AN5006-20 via the 5th to 8th E1 links. The AN5006-20
has 100 POTS subscribers.

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side

Item Description Example

Configuring Configure the local node name of the


Local node
the Local Node AN3300-C1 according to the operator's fiber
name
Name network planning.

Configure this item according to the E1


E1 No. 1 to 4 5 to 8
serial number that is actually used.

Switch Enables the connected E1 interface. Enable


Select non-frame mode, CRC multiframe
Framemode mode or framing mode according to the CRC multiframe framemode
Configuring E1
operator's network planning.
Data
Select the E1 interface impedance that
Impedance 75©
is actually used.

Configure the E1 link ID connected with


LinkID the V5 switch according to the operator's 0 to 3 -
network planning.

Main Clock Sets the acquirement mode of the active


Extracts from the 1st E1
Configuring Mode clock.
Clock Data Backup Clock Sets the acquirement mode of the
Extracts from the 2nd E1
Mode standby clock.

The V5 serial number will be


V5 serial 1
automatically generated.

Configure this item according to the


V5 Name fiberv5
operator’s network planning.

Select the protocol type supported by


V5 type the V5 interface according to the V5.2
V5 Config network planning of the operator.

Configure the V5 interface ID for switch


V5 ID identification according to the network 2
planning of the operator.

Configure the V5 interface variable


V5 variant according to the network planning of the 0
operator.

3-42 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the E1 serial number


E1 list connected with the V5 switch according 1 to 4
to the operator's network planning.

Configure the E1 serial number to be the


E1 No. C channel according to the operator's 1 2 5 6
network planning.

Select the timeslot 16 as the C channel


Timeslot according to the network planning of the 16
operator.

Select C channel type according to the


network planning of the operator.
Select the working and protection C
C Channel channels for the uplink (the type of the Node-C
Channel type Active aux
Config working channel is Active, and the type Channel
of the protection channel is aux).
The downlink C channel is the node
communication channel.
Configure the active C channel identifier
Cpath ID according to the network planning of the 1 - -
operator.

Select C channel signaling protocol


Ctrl Bcc Link ctrl
protocol according to the network planning of the -
Protect Pstn isdn
operator.

The name of the local node connected


Node name aa
Configuring with the AN5006-20.
Node Data The serial number of E1 actually
E1 list 5 to 8
connected with the AN5006-20.
Select the V5 interface name according
V5 Name fiberv5
to the network planning of the operator.

Configure the starting value of the L3


Start Protocol address distributed by the V5 switch
1
Address according to the operator's network
Configuring
planning.
the V5 PSTN
Configure the local node name of the
User Data
Relative node AN5006-20 according to the operator's aa
network planning.

Configure the starting value of the user


Start User ID ID bound with the L3 address according 1
to the operator's network planning.

Version: B/1 3-43


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure accessed POTS user quantity


user number according to the network planning of the 100
operator.

Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side

Item Description Example

Configuring Configure the local node name of


the Local Local node name the AN5006-20 according to the aa
Node Data operator's network planning.

Configure this item according to


E1 Port No. the E1 serial number that is 1 2 3 4
actually used.

Enables the connected E1


Switch Enable
interface.
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
Frame mode framemode
Configuring operator. This item should be
E1 Data consistent with the AN3300-C1.
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
Impedance 75©
operator. This item should be
consistent with the AN3300-C1.
Select the timeslot 16 as the C
Cchannel Switch channel according to the network Enable Enable Disable Disable
planning of the operator.

Sets the acquirement mode of the


Main Clock Mode Extracts from the 1st E1
Configuring active clock.
Clock Backup Clock Sets the acquirement mode of the
Extracts from the 2nd E1
Mode standby clock.

Configure the local node name of


Remote Node
the AN3300-C1 according to the fiber
Remote Node Name
operator's network planning.
Name Config
The serial number of E1 actually
E1-1 to E1-4 E1-1 to E1-4
connected with the AN3300-C1.
Configuring Select the POTS card interface
the V5 PSTN Slot No. that is actually used according to 3 4
User Data the operator's network planning.

3-44 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select the POTS card interface


Port No. that is actually used according to 1 to 64 1 to 36
the operator's network planning.

Configure the local node name of


Remote Node
the AN3300-C1 according to the fiber
Name
operator's network planning.

Configure the user ID bound with


User ID the L3 address according to the 1 to 64 65 to 100
operator's network planning.

Version: B/1 3-45


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service

3.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1

The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice
service on the AN3300-C1.

3-46 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.5.1 Configuring the Local Node Name

When the AN3300-C1 serves as the remote node of the AN5006-20, set the local
node name for easy identification by the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and select the Local Node Name Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name

3.3.5.2 Configuring E1 Data

Configure basic parameters of the uplink and downlink E1 links of the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the E1 Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-47


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)

3.3.5.3 Configuring Clock Data

Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the Clock Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data

3.3.5.4 Configuring V5 Data

Configure the AN3300-C1's V5 parameters that match the V5 switch.

3-48 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 data configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data

3.3.5.5 Configuring Channel C

Configure parameters of the C channel that connects the AN3300-C1 with the V5
switch and the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the C Channel Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 4 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add four Channel C configuration
entries.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 3-49


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data

3.3.5.6 Configuring Node Data

Configure parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the Node Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a node data configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data

3.3.5.7 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data

Configure user parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.

3-50 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the


Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 PSTN User Config tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 PSTN user data
configuration entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)

3.3.5.8 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Save the current configuration data to the AN3300-C1's Flash, so as to avoid loss of
the equipment configuration data as a result of power failure.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-40.

Version: B/1 3-51


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side)

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

3.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20

The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice
service on the AN5006-20.

3.3.6.1 Configuring the Local Node Data

Configure the local node name of the AN5006-20 for identifying the remote node
(the AN3300-C1).

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-52 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíLocal Node Name


Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Local Node
Name Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data

3.3.6.2 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the E1 link of the AN5006-20 for connection with the AN3300-C1.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíE1 Configuration in the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side)

Version: B/1 3-53


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.3.6.3 Configuring Clock

Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíClock Configuration in the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the Clock Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock

3.3.6.4 Configuring the Remote Node Data

Configure the data for the remote node (the AN3300-C1) connected with the
AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíRemote Node Data


Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Remote Node
Data Configuration tab.

3-54 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a remote node data configuration
entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data

3.3.6.5 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data

Configure the V5 PSTN user data of the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 PSTN User


Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the V5 PSTN User
Configuration tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card in Slot 3
and the port 1 to 36 of the POTS card in Slot 4.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-45.

Version: B/1 3-55


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side)

3.3.6.6 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Save configuration to the AN5006-20's Flash, so as to avoid the AN5006-20


configuration data loss caused by power failure.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-46.

3-56 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side)

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

3.3.7 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of PSTN voice services, check the equipment
status as follows.

3.3.7.1 Checking E1 Status

Check the E1 link status of the AN5006-20 to check whether the E1 configuration is
successful.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíE1 Status in the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Status tab.

Version: B/1 3-57


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar, and the Link Status of the four E1
links will display Normal, which suggests correct configuration of the E1 links.
However, if other statuses are displayed, check for any errors in the
configuration. The normal display is as shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status

3.3.7.2 Checking Node Status

Check the node status of the AN5006-20 and whether the node data configuration is
successful.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíNode Status in the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the Node Status tab.

4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar. If the connections between the four E1
links and the node are displayed as Normal and the sequence number of the
signaling E1 is not 0, the node configuration is correct; otherwise, check for any
error in the configuration. The status is shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status

3-58 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.4 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configurations items for voice services.

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Configure the related parameters of the POTS card, mainly include user dialing,
accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be
set less than the FLASH duration.

Note:

The following introduces the access method for configuring the POTS
common parameters on the network management system, applicable for
the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and
MCU-GPON2 cards.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOTS General


Parameter to bring up the POTS General Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Version: B/1 3-59


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer

Set the related parameters of the digitmap to control the report time of the number
that subscribers dial. The start timer is only applicable to the H.248 protocol, while
the maximum wait time, long timer, short timer and digitmap notify are applicable to
the H.248 and SIP protocols.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Timer to open the
Voice Timer tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer

3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile

Configure the parameters related to DSP speech encoding, including speech


encoding mode, voice quality, volume, DTMF, and so on. The Default profile cannot
be modified or deleted.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-60 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíDSP Configuration


Profile to bring up the DSP Configuration Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile

3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters

Configure the related parameters of fax, including the mode, coding mode, fax
report function and packet transmission / receiving time interval used by fax. The
item VBD Enable can only be configured when the fax mode is set to T30
Transparent.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíFax Parameter to bring


up the Fax Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters

Version: B/1 3-61


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

The following introduces how to configure the POS service telephone number. The
POS number is provided by UnionPay Center. The equipment identifies the POS
services using the POS telephone number and optimizes the POS telephone
number.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOS Phone Number to


open the POS Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a POS phone number
entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the UnionPay


Center.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number

The following introduces how to configure the Intelligent Public Telephone (IPT)
number. The prefix of the IPT number is provided by the IPT platform. The
equipment identifies the IPT service using the IPT number and optimizes the IPT
number.

3-62 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíIPT Phone Number to


open the IPT Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an IPT phone number
entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the IPT platform.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number

3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

This command is used to configure the timeout duration of different signal tones
after users pick up the telephone.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSignal Tone Timer


Config to open the Signal Tone Timer Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

Version: B/1 3-63


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

3.4.8 2833 Configuration

2833 is the RTP payload format used by the DTMF digital signal, phone tone and
phone signal. This function is used if no related parameters of the 2833 signaling
negotiation exist.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Serviceí2388 Config to open the
2388 Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

The following introduces the voice service MEGACO / MGCP configuration items.

3-64 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

Configure the MD5 authentication of the voice service for the authentication
between the MG and MGC. The MD5 authentication is applicable to the H.248
protocol only.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP


ConfigíVoice MD5 Authentication to bring up the Voice MD5
Authentication tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data of the project.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-57.

Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing


Parameters

Users can configure this parameter to ensure the consistency of the softswitch
platform status and the ONU equipment side status after the howler tone times out.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 3-65


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP


ConfigíVoice Off Hook Warning Tone Timeout to bring up the Off Hook
Warning Tone Timeout tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters

3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

Configure the caller ID display mode for subscribers. The caller ID display modes
include FSK and DTMF.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP


ConfigíCaller ID Mode to bring up the Caller ID Mode tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

3-66 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3.6 SIP Configuration

The following introduces how to make advanced SIP configurations and how to
configure the SIP subscriber call profile.

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration

This configuration is used for the intercommunication of the softswitch platform, and
is applicable to the softswitch platforms offered by different manufacturers. It is
advisable to use the default configuration.

In the configuration of user call configuration profile, if the three-party calling


function is disabled, the Call CW/CONF Mode parameter in the SIP advanced
configuration is invalid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP


Advanced Config to open the SIP Advanced Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60 SIP Advanced Configuration

Version: B/1 3-67


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

Some of the ONU voice functions will be enabled or disabled according to the profile.
After being bound to the profile, the ONU port will get its configuration from the
profile. It is advisable to use the default configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP User


Call Config Profile to open the SIP User Call Config Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-61.

Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Register or unregister the MGC currently connected to the AN5006-20. When the
currently connected MGC is unregistered, the AN5006-20 will disconnect from the
current MGC and automatically connect with the standby MGC. This operation is
applicable to the H.248 protocol.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-68 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíMGC Register/


Unregister to open the MGC Register/Unregister tab.

4. Set the register/unregister status to Register, and the MGC IP address to


192.168.1.1.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-62.

Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Register or unregister the user port of the POTS card to / from the MGC of the
Softswitch platform. Users can no longer use the port once the port is unregistered.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíNGN User Register/


Unregister to open the NGN User Register/Unregister tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Set the port number to 1, and register/unregister status to Register.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users

Version: B/1 3-69


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the voice statistics information.

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the signaling
packets between the AN5006-20 and the softswitch platform MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíSignal Packets Statistic


Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the Signal Packets Statistic
Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data flow
transmitted and received by the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3-70 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in


the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream


Port

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data
stream at the POTS port on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíRTP Stream Port Statistics


Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the RTP Stream Port
Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-66.

Version: B/1 3-71


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port

3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of calls at the POTS
port on the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in


the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-67.

3-72 Version: B/1


3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

Version: B/1 3-73


4 Configuring Data Services

The following introduces how to start up the data services for the AN5006-20.

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent Mode

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Transparent Mode

The following introduces how to configure ADSL data service in the transparent
mode.

4.1.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag,


transparent transmission, 1:1 translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet
frames uplinked from the user end. In this example, the transparent
transmission mode is used.

u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frames uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an
intelligent switch or a home gateway. Then the AN5006-20 transparently
transmits the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to
the providers network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the transparent transmission


mode, and the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original
messages by default.

4.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.

4-2 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Network Diagram

Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode

The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 100 to 163 on the
terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the
providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

4.1.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according


to the network planning of the
Configuring the uplink
Service Name operator. The service name data1
service VLAN
should contain no more than
30 characters.

Version: B/1 4-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The starting VLAN ID of the


uplink port service. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095
Starting VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 1000
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The ending VLAN ID of the


uplink port service. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095
Ending VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 1000
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the uplink


Port No. / Trunk Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk GE1
ground number.

Set the uplink service VLAN


tag processing mode. Two
options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the
tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped
automatically when they
Port Tag/Untag tag
pass the uplink port and
the packets will be
transmitted in the untag
form.
u In the tag mode, the tags
of the uplink data packets
will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.

Configure this item according


Configuring the ADSL
Profile Name to the network planning of the adsl
line profile
operator.

4-4 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according


to the operator’s network Adsl2+ Adsl2
Transmission Mode
planning; the default setting is G.dmt ReAdsl2
Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode;
three modes are available:
upRateMode fixed, adaptAtStart and adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime. The default
mode is adaptAtStart.

Downlink channel rate mode;


three modes are available:
downRateMode fixed, adaptAtStart and adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime. The default
mode is adaptAtStart.

Five types are available:


NoChannel, Fast, interleave
Line Type interleave
(by default), FastOrInterleave,
and FastAndInterleave.
The value range is 0 to
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) 100000; the unit is kbit/s; and 0
the default value is 0 kbit/s.
The value range is 0 to
Min Rate Up (Kbit/s) 100000; the unit is kbit/s; and 0
the default value is 0 kbit/s.
SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
The value ranges from 0 to
Max SNRM Dn (dB) 31; the unit is dB; and the 31
default value is 31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to
Max SNRM Up (dB) 31; the unit is dB; and the 31
default value is 31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to
Min SNRM Dn (dB) 31; the unit is dB; and the 0
default value is 0dB.
The value ranges from 0 to
Min SNRM Up (dB) 31; the unit is dB; and the 0
default value is 0dB.

Version: B/1 4-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to


Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) 63; the unit is ms; and the 16
default value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) 63; the unit is ms; and the 16
default value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value 0 Symbol
is 0 Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value 0 Symbol
is 0 Symbol.

Enables or disables the


Bit Swap Dn downlink bit swap function. Disable
The default value is Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink
Bit Swap Up bit swap function. The default Disable
value is Disable.
Four power modes are
available: L0Mode, L2Mode,
Power Mode L0Mode
L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. The
default setting is L0Mode.

The value range is 0 to 65534;


Pm L0 Time (s) the unit is second; and the 300
default value is 300 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 65534;
Pm L2 Time (s) the unit is second; and the 30
default value is 30 seconds.
The value ranges from 0 to
Pm L2 Atprt (dB) 15; the unit is dB; and the 3
default value is 3dB.
The value range is 0 to 1024;
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the 32
default value is 32kbit/s.
Start Frequency Band (tone) / End Sets the ToneBlackout band.
-
Frequency Band (tone) The default setting is null.

4-6 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the AD64


Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports
The port number of the AD64
to the ADSL line Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
profile
The configured ADSL line
Profile Id adsl
profile.

Configure according to the


network planning of the
Profile Name operator. The maximum DEFPVC.PRF
length is 20 characters. The
default value is DEFPVC.PRF.

Configuring the PVC The PVC index number. The


PVCNO 0
profile value ranges from 0 to 7.

The value ranges from 0 to


VPI 255, and the default value is 8
8.
The value range is 0 and 32 to
VCI 35
65535; the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64
Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports The port number of the AD64
Port No. 1 to 64
to the PVC profile card in actual use.
Select the configured PVC
Profile Id DEFPVC.PRF
profile.

Configure this item according


to the network planning of the
operator. The profile name PORTRATE.
Profile Name
should contain no more than PRF0
20 characters. The default
profile name is NULL.
Configuring the port
Enables or disables the uplink
rate limiting profile
US Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value ranges from 64 to


1000000; the unit is kbit/s;
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 512
and the default value is 64
kbit/s.

Version: B/1 4-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to


US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 2000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the


downlink Policing status
DS Policing Status Enable
function. The default setting is
Disable.
The value range is 64 to
1000000; the unit is kbit/s;
DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 8000
and the default value is
64kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0
DS PIR (Kbit/s) and 16777215; the unit is 10240
kbit/s.
The slot number of the AD64
Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports
The port number of the AD64
to the rate limiting Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
profile
Select the configured rate PORTRATE.
Profile ID
limiting profile. PRF0
The slot number of the AD64
Slot Number 3
card in actual use.
The port number of the AD64
Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The
PVCNO 0
value range is from 0 to 7.
Configuring the port The service types include
service VLAN Service Type unicast and multicast. The Unicast
data service is unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode
for this service; the tag mode,
CVLAN Mode the transparent mode and the Transparent
translation mode are
supported.

4-8 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

Rules of the CVLAN


translation. When rules are
required, this parameter is the
CVLAN Rule ID NULL
name of the user-defined rule;
when rules are not required,
set this parameter to null.

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from
VLAN ID 100 to 163
1 to 4095.
CVLAN Settings
The CVLAN priority, ranging
from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest
Priority or COS 0
priority level, and 0 is the
lowest one.
The stacked VLANs.
Configure this item according
QinQ State to the network planning of the Enable
operator. Select Enable or
Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is
the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID NULL
rule. When rules are not
required, set this parameter to
null.
The SVLAN priority, ranging
from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest
Priority or COS 0
priority level, and 0 is the
QinQ Settings lowest one.
The SVLAN ID, ranging from
VLAN ID 1000
1 to 4095.
TPID 33024 33024
The slot number of the AD64
Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.

The port number of the AD64


Enabling the ADSL Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
port
Enables or disables the ADSL
Enable port. The default setting is Enable
Disable.

Version: B/1 4-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the AD64


Slot Number 3
card in actual use.
The port number of the AD64
Port Number 1 to 64
Enabling the port card in actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The
PVC Index 0
value ranges from 0 to 7.

Enables or disables the PVC.


PVC Enable Enable
The default setting is Disable.

4.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL data service in the transparent mode is shown in
Figure 4-2.

4-10 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode

Version: B/1 4-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

4-12 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

4.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL


Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

Version: B/1 4-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

4.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

4-14 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

4.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
Version: B/1 4-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

4.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-9.

4-16 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode

4.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Version: B/1 4-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)

4-18 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Version: B/1 4-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

4-20 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Version: B/1 4-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

4.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or transmit
data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

4-22 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 4-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the


AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-18.

4-24 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-19 .

Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent Mode

Version: B/1 4-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.1.15 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after configuration is completed.

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Tag Mode

The following introduces how to configure the ADSL data service in the Tag mode.

4.2.1 Configuration Rules

u The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frames uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, we use the Tag mode.

u When the subscriber uses the AD64 card as the service interface card, the
subscriber's PCs are connected with ports on the interface cards provided by
the equipment through the modems. To be specific, packets from the
subscribers are all untagged. The Ethernet frames are respectively added with
the stacked VLANs by the AN5006-20 and then uplinked to the upper layer
network.

4.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.

4-26 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Network Diagram

Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode

The AN5006-20 adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000 to the inner CVLAN tags 100 to
163 on the terminal side, and then transmits the data to the providers network. In the
downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

4.2.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to


Configuring the the network planning of the
uplink service Service Name operator. The service name should data2
VLAN contain no more than 30
characters.

Version: B/1 4-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The starting VLAN ID of the


service. Value range: 1 to 4095
(excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092).
Starting VLAN ID 1000
The starting VLAN ID should not
be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
The ending VLAN ID of the
service. The value ranges from 1
to 4095 (except 4088, 4089, and
Ending VLAN ID 1000
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the uplink


Port No. / Trunk Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk ground GE1
number.
The uplink service VLAN tag
processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
Port Tag / Untag they pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will
not be stripped when they
pass the uplink port.

Configure this item according to


Profile Name the network planning of the adsl
operator.

Configure this item according to


the operator’s network planning; Adsl2+ Adsl2
Configuring the Transmission Mode
the default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2
ADSL line profile
G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode; three
modes are available: fixed,
upRateMode adaptAtStart
adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.
The default mode is adaptAtStart.

4-28 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Downlink channel rate mode;


three modes are available: fixed,
downRateMode adaptAtStart
adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.
The default mode is adaptAtStart.

Five types are available:


NoChannel, Fast, interleave (by
Line Type interleave
default), FastOrInterleave, and
FastAndInterleave.
The value range is 0 to 100000;
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
value is 0kbit/s.
The value range is 0 to 100000;
Min Rate Up (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
value is 0kbit/s.
SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
Max SNRM Dn (dB) unit is dB; and the default value is 31
31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
Max SNRM Up (dB) unit is dB; and the default value is 31
31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
Min SNRM Dn (dB) unit is dB; and the default value is 0
0dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
Min SNRM Up (dB) unit is dB; and the default value is 0
0dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) unit is ms; and the default value is 16
16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) unit is ms; and the default value is 16
16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

Version: B/1 4-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

Enables or disables the downlink


Bit Swap Dn bit swap function. The default Disable
value is Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink bit
Bit Swap Up swap function. The default value is Disable
Disable.
Four power modes are available:
L0Mode, L2Mode, L3Mode,
Power Mode L0Mode
L2AndL3Mode. The default setting
is L0Mode.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
Pm L0 Time (s) unit is second; and the default 300
value is 300 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
Pm L2 Time (s) unit is second; and the default 30
value is 30 seconds.
The value range is 0 to 15; the unit
Pm L2 Atprt (dB) 3
is dB; and the default value is 3dB.
The value range is 0 to 1024; the
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 32
is 32kbit/s.
Start Frequency Band (tone) / End Sets the ToneBlackout band. The
-
Frequency Band (tone) default setting is null.

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot No. 3
Binding ADSL that is actually used.
ports to the The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
ADSL line profile in actual use.
Profile Id The configured ADSL line profile. adsl
Configure according to the
network planning of the operator.
Profile Name The maximum length is 20 DEFPVC.PRF
Configuring the
characters. The default value is
PVC profile
defaultPvcPrf.
The PVC index number. The value
PVCNO 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

4-30 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 255,


VPI 8
and the default value is 8.
The value range is 0 and 32 to
VCI 35
65535; the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64 card
Slot No. 3
Binding ADSL that is actually used.
ports to the PVC The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
profile in actual use.
Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator. The profile name should PORTRATE.
Profile Name
contain no more than 20 PRF0
characters. The default profile
name is NULL.
Enables or disables the uplink
US Policing Status Policing status function. The Disable
default setting is Disable.

The value range is 64 to 1000000;


US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 512
Configuring the value is 64kbit/s.
port rate limiting
The value ranges from 0 to
profile US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value range is 64 to 1000000;


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 8000
value is 64kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0 and
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the AD64 card
Binding ADSL Slot No. 3
that is actually used.
ports to the rate
The port number of the AD64 card
limiting profile Port No. 1 to 64
in actual use.

Version: B/1 4-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select the configured rate limiting PORTRATE.


Profile ID
profile. PRF0
The slot number of the AD64 card
Slot Number 3
in actual use.
The port number of the AD64 card
Port Number 1 to 64
in actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value
PVC Index 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

The service types include unicast


Service Type and multicast. The data service is Unicast
unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for
this service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode TAG
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


When rules are required, this
CVLAN Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
defined rule; when rules are not
Configuring the
required, set this parameter to null.
port service
TPID The default value is 33024. 33024
VLAN
The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 100 to 163
CVLAN Settings 4095.
The CVLAN priority, ranging from
Priority or COS 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority 0
level, and 0 is the lowest one.
The stacked VLANs. Configure
this item according to the network
QinQ State Enable
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
QinQ Rule ID name of the user-defined rule. NULL
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.

The SVLAN priority, ranging from


QinQ Settings Priority or COS 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority 0
level, and 0 is the lowest one.

4-32 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to


VLAN ID 1000
4095.
TPID 33024 33024
The slot number of the AD64 card
Slot No. 3
that is actually used.
Enabling the The port number of the AD64 card
Port No. 1 to 64
ADSL port in actual use.
Enables or disables the ADSL
Enable Enable
port. The default setting is Disable.

The slot number of the AD64 card


Slot Number 3
that is actually used.

The port number of the AD64 card


Port Number 1 to 64
Enabling the port in actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value
PVC Index 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

Enables or disables the PVC. The


PVC Enable Enable
default setting is Disable.

4.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the ADSL data service in the Tag mode is shown in
Figure 4-21.

Version: B/1 4-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode

4-34 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 4-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL


Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-24.

4-36 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode (Completed)

4.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

Version: B/1 4-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

4-38 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-28.

Version: B/1 4-39


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed)

4.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4-40 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode

4.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 4-41


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-32.

4-42 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 4-43


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-34.

4-44 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode

4.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

Version: B/1 4-45


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Completed)

4-46 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the


AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag Mode

Version: B/1 4-47


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.2.15 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data


Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the 1:1
translation mode.

4.3.1 Configuration Rules

u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,
the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

4-48 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM is used, the PVC function must be configured and the VDSL
service is validated in the PVC. When the PTM is used, the PVC function
should not be configured and the VDSL service is validated in the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example the 1:1 translation mode is configured.

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent
switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is
translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is
translated into a different VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the
SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the 1:1 translation mode, and the
system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages by
default.

4.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 32 data services.

Network Diagram

Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-49


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 131 on the terminal side into the
CVLAN tags 200 to 231, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data
to the upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes
place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an VD32 card is used.

4.3.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the user
side. The management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory cards. The planning data are shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
Service Name data3
The service name should contain
no more than 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the
service. Value range: 1 to 4095
Starting VLAN ID (excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092). 1000
Configuring the The starting VLAN ID should not be
uplink service larger than the ending VLAN ID.
VLAN The ending VLAN ID of the service.
Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
Ending VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The 1000
starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the uplink


Port No. / Trunk Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk ground GE1
number.

4-50 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
Port Tag / Untag they pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will not
be stripped when they pass
the uplink port.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdline
network planning of the operator.

The data encapsulation mode.


When the equipment is connected
Port Mode with the ADSL Modem, select ATM; PTM
otherwise select PTM. The options
include ATM, PTM and ADAPT.
The equipment supports eight
standard profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D,
12A, 12B, 17A and 30A) and the
Configuring the comprehensive mode ALL, so as to
VDSL line basic improve its ability to adapt to
profile complex scenarios. The digital
number in the value stands for the
maximum cut-off frequency, while
Standard Profile ALL
the letter stands for the power
features. For example, 17A means
that the maximum cut-off frequency
is 17 MHz and the maximum
downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is ALL.

Version: B/1 4-51


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Defines the Tx power at each


frequency point. Each group of
definitions makes up a power
spectrum, including A_EU_128, B8_11_
Psd Shape B7_BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc. 998ADE17_M2x_
Configure this item according to the A
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 25.5


(unit: dBm), accurate to one
MaxTxPowerDn (dBm) 20.5
decimal place. The default setting
is 20.5 dBm.
The value ranges from 0.0 to 20.2
(unit: dBm), accurate to one
MaxTxPowerUp (dBm) 14.5
decimal place. The default setting
is 14.5 dBm.
Set the start frequency band and
end frequency band for the RFI
RFI Set -
notch according to the actual
condition.
Set the filtering starting and ending
ToneBlackout Set -
bands as required.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.
Binding VDSL
The port number of the VD32 card
ports to the VDSL Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.
line basic profile
Select the configured basic VDSL
Profile Id vdline
line profile.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdservice
network planning of the operator.

The options include fixed,


Configuring the
upRateMode adaptAtStart, and adaptAtStart
VDSL service
adaptAtRuntime.
profile
The options include fixed,
downRateMode adaptAtStart, and adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime.

4-52 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

The options include user define


MaxSNRMDnMode and unlimited. The default setting User define
is user define.
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Max SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Min SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0.

The options include user define


MaxSNRMUpMode and unlimited. The default setting User define
is user define.
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Max SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Min SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0.

The value range is 64 to 200000;


Max Rate Dn (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 128000
value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 64
is 64.
The value range is 64 to 200000;
Max Rate Up (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 128000
value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Down (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 64
is 64.
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) 16
is ms; and the default value is 16.

Version: B/1 4-53


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value range is 0 to 63; the unit


Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) 16
is ms; and the default value is 16.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.
Binding VDSL
The port number of the VD32 card
ports to the VDSL Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.
service profile
Select the configured VDSL service
Profile Id vdservice
profile.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
PORTRATE.
Profile Name The profile name should contain no
PRF0
more than 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink


US Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value range is 64 to 1000000;


US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 512

Configuring the value is 64.

port rate limiting The value ranges from 0 to


US CBS (Byte) 20000
profile 4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value range is 64 to 1000000;


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 8000
value is 64.
The value ranges between 0 and
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.

4-54 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.
Binding VDSL
The port number of the VD32 card
ports to the rate Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.
limiting profile
Select the configured rate limiting PORTRATE.
Profile Id
profile. PRF0
The slot number of the VD32 card
Slot Number 1
actually used.

The port number of the VD32 card


Port Number 1 to 32
actually used.

The PVC in actual use. The value


PVC Index 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

The service types include unicast


Service Type and multicast. Select unicast for the Unicast
data service.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode Translation
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


Configuring the When rules are required, this
port service CVLAN Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
VLAN defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 100 to 131
CVLAN Settings 4095.
The CVLAN priority level, ranging
Priority or COS from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

The VLAN ID after translation; the


VLAN ID 200 to 231
value ranges from 1 to 4095.

The translation priority level. The


Translation
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands
VLAN Settings Priority or COS 0
for the highest priority while 0 the
lowest one.
TPID 33024 33024

Version: B/1 4-55


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The stacked VLANs. Configure this


item according to the network
QinQ State Enable
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
QinQ Rule ID name of the user-defined rule. NULL
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.

The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0


Priority or COS to 7. 7 stands for the highest 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.
QinQ Settings
The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 1000
4095.
TPID 33024 33024
The slot number of the VD32 card
Slot No. 2
actually used.

Enabling the The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1 to 32
VDSL port actually used.

Enables or disables the VDSL port.


Enable Enable
The default setting is Disable.

4.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the 1:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-40.

4-56 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: B/1 4-57


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

4-58 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 4-59


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD


Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

4-60 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD


Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-45.

Version: B/1 4-61


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-46.

4-62 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

4.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 4-63


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select all the 32 ports, as shown in Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 4-49.

4-64 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redot refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 4-65


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1 Translation Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-51.

4-66 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

Version: B/1 4-67


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)

4.3.14 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC32 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4-68 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data


Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the N:1
translation mode.

4.4.1 Configuration Rules

u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,
the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. The example is configured in the N:1 translation mode.

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent
switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is
translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is
translated into the same VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the
SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-defined COS value becomes invalid in the N:1 translation mode, and
the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages
by default.

Version: B/1 4-69


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.4.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 1 data services.

Network Diagram

Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 101 on the terminal side into the
CVLAN tag 200, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data to the
upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 cards. In this example, an VD32 card is used.

4.4.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card. The
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-4.

4-70 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network planning


Service Name of the operator. The maximum length of the data4
service name is 30 characters.
The starting value of the service VLAN ID.
The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding
Starting VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID 1000
should not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
The ending value of the service VLAN ID.
The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding
VLAN ID End 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID 1000
should not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
Configuring Uplink
Port number or the The port number of the uplink service VLAN
Service VLAN GE1
trunk group ID or the Trunk group number.

Set the VLAN tag attribute of the uplink


service. The attribute includes untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag tag
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink /
downlink data packets will not be
processed when they pass the port.

Configure according to the network planning


Profile Name vdline
of the operator.
Configuring the Basic
The data encapsulation mode. When the
Profile of the VDSL
equipment is connected with the ADSL
Line Port Mode PTM
Modem, select ATM; otherwise select PTM.
Includes ATM, PTM, and self adapting.

Version: B/1 4-71


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The equipment supports eight standard


profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, 17A and
30A) and the comprehensive mode ALL, so
as to improve the ability to adapt to complex
scenarios. Among them, the digital number
means the maximum cut-off frequency, and
Standard profile ALL
the letter means the power attribute. For
example, 17A means that the maximum cut-
off frequency is 17 MHz and the maximum
downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The default setting is ALL.

Defines the Tx power at each frequency


point. Each group of definition indicates one
power spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_
Power Spectrum B8_11_998ADE17_
BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.
Profile M2x_A
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.

The value range is from 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:


Down Max Tx Power dBm) with a measurement carried to one 20.5
decimal place. The default setting is 20.5.

The value range is from 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:


dBm) with a measurement carried to one
Max Tx power Up 14.5
decimal place. The default setting is 14.5
dBm.
Slot Band Config Sets the starting and ending bands of slot. -

Sets the starting and ending bands of


Filtering Band Config -
filtering.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
Binding an VDSL Port use.
to the VDSL Line The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Basic Profile use.
VDSL Line Profile The configured VDSL line profile. vdline
Configure according to the network planning
Profile Name vdservice
Configuring the VDSL of the operator.
Service Profile The options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and
Up Rate Mode adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime.

4-72 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and


Down Rate Mode adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)


Target SNRMDn (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0.

Includes User Defined and No Limit. The


Max SNRMDn Mode User Defined
default value is User Defined.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
Max SNRMDn (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)


Min SNRMDn (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)


Target SNRMUp (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0.

Max. Target SNRM Includes User Defined and No Limit. The


User Defined
Up default value is User Defined.
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
Max SNRMUp (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0.

The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)


Min SNRMUp (dB) with a measurement carried to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0.

The value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is


Max Rate Down 128000
kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is
Min Rate Down 64
kbit/s; and the default value is 64.
The value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is
Max Rate Up 128000
kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is
Min Rate Down 64
kbit/s; and the default value is 64.
MaxInterleaveDe- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
16
layDn (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
MaxInterleaveDelay- The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
16
Up (ms) and the default value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and
MinINPDn 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

Version: B/1 4-73


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and


MinINPUp 0 Symbol
the default value is 0 Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
Binding a VDSL Port use.
to the VDSL Service The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Profile use.
VDSL Service Profile Select the configured VDSL service profile. vdservice
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The maximum length of the
Profile Name PORTRATE.PRF0
profile name is 20 characters. The default
profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink Policing status


Uplink Policing status Enable
function. The default value is Disable.
Uplink Port CIR The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is
512
(Kbit/s) kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.

Configuring Port Rate The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


US CBS (Byte) 2000
Limiting Profile The unit is Byte.

Uplink Excess Burst The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.


2000
Size (Byte) The unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink Policing


DS Policing status Enable
status function. The default value is Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is
8000
(Kbit/s) kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.
The value range is from 0 to 16777215. The
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 2
Binding a VDSL Port use.
to the Rate Limiting The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Profile use.
Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
Slot No. 2
use.
The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Configuring a Port use.
Service VLAN The PVC in actual use. The value range is
PVC index 0
from 0 to 7.
The service type, including unicast and
Service Type unicast
multicast. The data service is unicast.

4-74 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The CVLAN mode for this service. The tag


CVLAN Mode mode, the transparent mode, and the Translation
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When rules


are required, this parameter is the name of
CVlan Rule ID NULL
the user-defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 100 to 101


The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges
CVLAN priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while 0
0 is the lowest priority.

TTPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The VLAN ID after translation; the value
Translation ID 200
ranges from 1 to 4095.

The translation priority level. The value


Translation priority ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest 0
priority while 0 is the lowest priority.

The stacked VLANs, configured according to


QinQ Enable the operator’s network planning. Select Enable
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID NULL
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000


The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges
QINQ priority from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while 0
0 is the lowest priority.

The slot number of the VD32 card in actual


Slot No. 2
use.
Enabling the VDSL The port number of the VD32 card in actual
Port No. 1
Port use.
Enables or disables the VDSL port. The
ENABLEFLAG Enable
default setting is Disable.

Version: B/1 4-75


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4.4.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4-76 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

4.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

Version: B/1 4-77


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

4-78 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD


Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí


VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

Version: B/1 4-79


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD


Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-60.

4-80 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-61.

Version: B/1 4-81


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-62

4-82 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and select the line with the Port Number 1 in the
upper-right pane.

5. Click Add, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

6. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-63.

Version: B/1 4-83


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the entry of port No.1, and select Enable in the drop-down list of the
ENABLEFLAG.

4-84 Version: B/1


4 Configuring Data Services

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-64.

Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)

4.4.14 Configuration Result

PC1 and PC2 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

Version: B/1 4-85


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

The following introduces how to access the G.SHDSL service in the ATM and TDM
modes for the AN5006-20.

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local Mode)

Version: B/1 5-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on ATM

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode based on ATM.

5.1.1 Configuration Rules

ATM is a packet switch and multiplex technology based on cell. It is applicable in


LAN and WAN, with the features of fixed-length cell, connection-oriented, and good
real time performance, suitable for for the applications with high bandwidth, low
delay, and high data burst rate.

When users use the HD32A card as the service interface card, the Ethernet frames
uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an intelligent switch
or a CPE uplinked with the SHDSL. Then the AN5006-20 transparently transmits
the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to the providers
network.

5.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Access 31 G.SHDSL services based on the ATM via the HD32A card of the
AN5006-20 (the ports 1 and 2 are bound together as a group to provide larger
bandwidth for PC1).

5-2 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Network Diagram

Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 800 to 830 on the
terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the
providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the HD32A card to access the G.SHDSL service. In this
example, an HD32A card is used.

5.1.3 Planning Data

The HD32A card in Slot 4 of the AN5006-20 acts as the subscriber side interface
card, and the management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory. The planning data are shown in Table 5-1. Here the MCUA card acts
as the management control card.

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode

Item Description Example

Configuring the uplink The slot number of the MCUA card in


Slot No. 5
port attributes actual use.

Version: B/1 5-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The port number of the MCUA card in


Port No. actual use, including the GE1, GE2, GE3 GE3
and GE4 uplink ports.

The port type of the uplink card in actual


Port Type GE port
use.
Enables or disables the auto negotiation
function of the uplink port. It is not allowed
Auto-negotiation Enable
to disable the auto negotiation function of
the 10GE port.

The port rate of the uplink port. The default


Port Rate values of the 10GE and GE ports are 1000Mbps
10000 Mbps and 1000 Mbps respectively.

The duplex mode of the uplink port,


Port duplex mode including full duplex and half duplex. Full Full duplex
duplex is the default value.

Enables or disables the flow control


function of the uplink port. It is enabled
Port flow control when this item is selected, and disabled Disable
when this item is cleared. The default
setting is Disable.

Enables or disables the address learning


function of the uplink port. It is enabled
Port address
when this item is selected, and disabled Enable
learning
when this item is cleared. Enabled by
default.
Enables or disables the priority function of
the uplink port. It is enabled when this item
Port priority Enable
is selected, and disabled when this item is
cleared. Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the uplink port,


ranging from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest
Port priority value 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest level. The
default setting is 0.

5-4 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The interface mode of the uplink port,


including SerDes and SGMII. The default
value is SerDes. SerDes should be
configured if the uplink port is using an
Interface mode SerDes
optical module or a compulsory GE
electrical module. SGMII should be
configured if the uplink port is using a
10/100/1000Mbps electrical module.

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot No. 4
actual use.
Enabling the SHDSL The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
port actual use.
Enables or disables the SHDSL port. The
Enable Enable
default setting is Disable.

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot Number 4
actual use.
The port number of the HD32A card in
Port Number 1 to 32
Enabling the port actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value ranges
PVC Index 0
from 0 to 7.
Enables or disables the PVC. The default
PVC Enable Enable
setting is Disable.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator. The
Service Name Data
service name should contain no more than
30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
Starting VLAN ID 1000
Configuring the uplink service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.

service VLAN The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port


service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.
Ending VLAN ID 1000
The starting VLAN ID should not be larger
than the ending VLAN ID.

Port No. / Trunk The port number of the uplink service


5:GE3
Group ID VLAN or the Trunk ground number.

Version: B/1 5-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The uplink service VLAN tag processing


mode. Two options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
Port Tag / Untag automatically when they pass the tag
uplink port and the packets will be
transmitted in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink
data packets will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.

Configure according to the network


Profile Name ShdslATM
planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Port Mode network planning of the operator. The ATM
options include ATM and TDM.

Configure this item according to the


Code Type network planning of the operator. The PAM32
options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.

Configure this item according to the


Transmission
network planning of the operator. The Annex B
Configuring an standard
options include Annex A and Annex B.
SHDSL line profile
Target SNR Margin The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
Down (dB) and the default value is 6dB.
Insure SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
3
Down (DB) dB; and the default value is 3dB.
Uplink target signal- The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
to-noise ratio (DB) and the default value is 6dB.
Target SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
3
Up (DB) dB; and the default value is 3dB.
Enables or disables the line detection
Line Probe Enable Disable
function. The default setting is disable.

The slot number of the HD32A card in


Slot No. 4
Binding SHDSL ports actual use.
to the SHDSL line The port number of the HD32A card in
Port No. 1 to 32
profile actual use.
Profile ID The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslATM

5-6 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


planning of the operator. The maximum
Profile Name defaultPvcPrf
length is 20 characters. The default value is
defaultPvcPrf.
Configuring the PVC The PVC index number. The value ranges
PVCNO 0
profile from 0 to 7.
The value ranges from 0 to 255, and the
VPI 8
default value is 8.
The value range is 0 and 32 to 65535; the
VCI 35
default value is 35.
The slot number of the HD32A card
Slot No. 4
actually used.
Binding SHDSL ports
The port number of the HD32A card
to the PVC profile Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.

Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. defaultPvcPrf


Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
Profile Name profile name should contain no more than PORTRATE.PRF0
20 characters. The default profile name is
NULL.
Enables or disables the uplink Policing
US Policing Status status function. The default setting is Enable
Disable.
US Policing CIR The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
51200
(Kbit/s) is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.
Configuring the port
The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;
rate limiting profile US CBS (Byte) 20000
the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;


US EBS (Byte) 20000
the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink Policing


DS Policing Status status function. The default setting is Enable
Disable.
DS Policing CIR The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
51200
(Kbit/s) is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.

The value ranges between 0 and


DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.

Version: B/1 5-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the HD32A card


Slot No. 4
Binding SHDSL ports actually used.

to the rate limiting The port number of the HD32A card


Port No. 1 to 32
profile actually used.

Profile Id Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0


This ID is automatically generated by the
M-Pair Group Id -
system.

The slot number of the HD32A card


Configuring the Slot No. 4
actually used.
SHDSL port bound
Configure this item according to the
group Master Port No. 1
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Slave Port No. 2
network planning of the operator.

The slot number of the HD32A card


Slot No. 4
actually used.

The port number of the HD32A card


Port Number 1 to 32
actually used.

The PVC in actual use. The value ranges


PVC Index 0
from 0 to 7.
The service types include unicast and
Service Type multicast. Select unicast for the data Unicast
service.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
Configuring the port service; the tag mode, the transparent
CVLAN Mode Transparent
service VLAN mode and the translation mode are
supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When


rules are required, this parameter is the
CVLAN Rule ID null
name of the user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this parameter to null.

TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

VLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 800 to 830


The CVLAN priority level, ranging from 0 to
Priority or COS 7. 7 stands for the highest priority level, and 0
0 the lowest one.

5-8 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The stacked VLANs. Configure this item


QinQ State according to the network planning of the Enable
operator. Select Enable or Disable.

The QinQ rules for binding services. This


parameter is the name of the user-defined
QinQ Rule ID null
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000


The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0 to 7. 7
QINQ priority is the highest priority level, and 0 is the 0
lowest one.

5.1.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the ATM transparent mode is shown
in Figure 5-2.

Version: B/1 5-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode

5-10 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes

Configure the uplink port attributes, including parameters such as auto-negotiation


switch, the port flow control, and the port priority.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode

5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 5-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-5.

5-12 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode
(Completed)

5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the


HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window that appears, and
then click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 5-6.

Version: B/1 5-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL Service
Configuration

5. Click OK and return to the PVC Enable window. Click the Write to Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode (Completed)

5-14 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 5-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL


Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding


Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5-16 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5. Select ShdslATM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode (Completed)

Version: B/1 5-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The HD32A card provides 32 G.SHDSL user ports; and one G.SHDSL port
corresponds to eight PVCs. A PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services, and a G.SHDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode

5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

5-18 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding PVC Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-14.

Version: B/1 5-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-15.

5-20 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Binding Rate Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default
values for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Version: B/1 5-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5-22 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound


Group

Configure the SHDSL port bound group to enhance the line rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíSHDSL M-Pair to open


the SHDSL M-Pair tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.SHDSL Service
in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the HD32A card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

Version: B/1 5-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Click HD32A in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane.
Then select the 32 ports with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 5-20.

5-24 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select the Service Type check
box and select Unicast from the Initial Value drop-down list. Retain the default
values for other parameters.

9. Select the CVLAN Mode row, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down list.
Use the default values for other parameters.

10. Select the CVLAN Settings row. In the Configuration Item group box, select
the VLAN ID row, and enter 800 in the Initial Value field. Enter 1 in the Step
text box. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: B/1 5-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

11. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

12. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

13. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

5-26 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

14. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.17 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC31 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on TDM (Local Mode)

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode (local mode based on TDM).

5.2.1 Configuration Rules

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc.

Version: B/1 5-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

TDM means the time division multiplexing mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple
digital data, voice, and video signals at one medium at the same time via different
channels or timeslots. It needs clock synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.

5.2.2 Network Diagram

Service configuration

Access two G.SHDSL services via the HDT8A card of the AN5006-20.

Network Diagram

Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

The PBX and E1 / V.35 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8A card
of the AN5006-20 via the Modem, and the user data are transparently transmitted to
the PSTN in the uplink direction via the E1 link of the HDT8A card. In the downlink
direction, the reverse process takes place.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the HDT8A and HDT8B cards to access the G.SHDSL
services. In this example, an HDT8A card is used.

5-28 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.2.3 Planning Data

The HDT8A card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the HDT8B card Optional. Users need


Configuring the Slot No. 1
that is actually used. to configure this item
working mode
Set the working mode of the HDT8B when the HDT8B card
of the card
Working Mode card. The options include local serves as the service Local
(optional)
mode and remote mode. interface card.

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual use. 1
Port No. The E1 port number of the HDT8A card actually used. E1-1
Configuring E1
Configure this item according to the network planning of the
data
Impedance operator. Select the E1 interface impedance that is actually 75©
used. The options include 75© and 120©.

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Configuring
E1
clock Main Clock Sets the clock acquirement mode.
1-LoopTimed

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Enabling the Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8
SHDSL port Enables or disables the SHDSL port. The default setting is
Enable Enable
Disable.
Configure this item according to the network planning of the
Profile Name ShdslTDM
operator.

Configure this item according to the network planning of the


Port Mode TDM
operator. The options include ATM and TDM.

Configure this item according to the network planning of the


Code Type PAM32
operator. The options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.
Configuring an
Transmission Configure this item according to the network planning of the
SHDSL line Annex B
standard operator. The options include Annex A and Annex B.
profile
Target SNR
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
Margin Down 6
value is 6 dB.
(dB)

Insure SNR
The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
Margin Down 3
value is 3dB.
(DB)

Version: B/1 5-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Target SNRM Up The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
6
(DB) value is 6 dB.
Target SNR The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
3
Margin Up (DB) value is 3dB.

Line Probe Enables or disables the line detection function. The default
Disable
Enable setting is disable.

Binding SHDSL Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
ports to the Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8
SHDSL line
profile Profile Id Select the configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM

5.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the TDM transparent transmission
mode is shown in Figure 5-24.

5-30 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the impedance value of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service


ConfigíE1 Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears, select

Version: B/1 5-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the E1


Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

5.2.6 Configuring Clock

Configure the mode of acquiring the E1 link clock.

Precautions

u The equipment supports clock acquired from multiple ways, including the local
oscillator clock and the clock extracted from E1 links 1 to 8.

u If the clock of the designated E1 link is unavailable, the equipment will search
for the available E1 link automatically according to the sequence of the E1 links.
For example, users want to extract clock from the first E1 link, but this E1 link is
unavailable. In this case, the equipment will try to extract the clock in sequence
starting from the second E1 link until the clock is extracted successfully.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

5-32 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service


ConfigíClock Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears,
select the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the Clock
Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission
Mode

5.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the HDT8A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, enter 0 in the Step field, and click
OK, as shown in Figure 5-27.

Version: B/1 5-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)

5-34 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL


Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 5-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding


Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select ShdslTDM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-31.

5-36 Version: B/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.2.10 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

Version: B/1 5-37


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

The following introduces how to start up the multicast services for the AN5006-20.

Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy
Mode

Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the


Controllable Mode

Version: B/1 6-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1 Example for Multicast Service Configuration


of the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the proxy mode.

6.1.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the
snooping mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the
user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so
as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.

u Each AD64 card can provide up to 64 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each AD64 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

6.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 proxy multicast services.

6-2 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Network Diagram

Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode

In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the
terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20
transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home
gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access multicast services in the proxy mode using the AD32,
AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

6.1.3 Planning Data

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the management control card,


Slot No. 5
being 5 fixedly.
Disabling the
Uplink Port Configure according to the number of the actually
Port No. 1
Multicast Packet used uplink port.
Suppression Packet Type Select Multicast, corresponding to multicast service. Multicast

Enable/disable Disables the multicast packet suppression function. Disable

Version: B/1 6-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Service ID Automatically assigned by the system 1


Configure this item according to the operator’s
Service Name iptv1
network planning.

Configure this item according to the operator’s


Starting VLAN ID 200
network planning.

Configure this item according to the operator’s


VLAN ID End 200
network planning.

Configure according to the number of the actually


Port No. GE1
Configuring used uplink port.
Uplink Service Set the VLAN tag property of the uplink service to
VLAN untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the uplink
packets will be stripped automatically when they
pass the port and the packets will be uplinked in
Port Tag/Untag the untag form, while the downlink untag packets tag
will be added with designated tags when they
pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink / downlink
data packets will not be processed when they
pass the port.

Configuring Configure this item according to the operator’s


IGMP Mode Proxy Mode
Multicast Mode network planning.

Configuring Configure this item according to the operator’s


IGMP Proxy IP 10.25.10.1
IGMP Proxy IP network planning.

Configure according to the network planning of the


Configuring Default SVLAN ID operator. The default multicast SVLAN ID should be in 200
Multicast Default the range of the uplink SVLAN.
VLAN Configure according to the network planning of the
Default CVLAN ID -
operator. Retain the default value.

The number of the slot actually used by the AD64


Slot No. 2
Configuring a card.
Port Service The number of the port actually used by the AD64
Port No. 1 to 64
VLAN card.
Service Type The actual service type Multicast

6-4 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the VLAN tag processing mode of the ADSL


port according to the network planning of the operator.
u TAG: Configures a VLAN tagging to the received
CVLAN Mode data. Transparent
u Translation: Translates the original VLAN ID to
one compliant with the operator's rules.
u Transparent: Transmits the received data directly.

Configure the received VLAN ID according to the


CVLAN ID 200
network planning of the operator.

The number of the slot actually used by the AD64


Slot No. 2
card.
Enabling the
The number of the port actually used by the AD64
ADSL Port Port No. 1 to 64
card.
ENABLEFLAG Enables the ADSL port. Enable

Version: B/1 6-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode

6.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the equipment's uplink port, so
as to avoid rate restriction on the multicast messages.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

6-6 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom


Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the
VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Version: B/1 6-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Precautions

u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the
snooping mode, whereas the service management card, as the proxy of the
user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so
as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.

u When the multicast mode is set to snooping, both the AD64 card and the
service management card work in the snooping mode. As the configuration
procedures in this mode are similar to those of the proxy mode, only different in
the multicast mode setting; configuration examples for the snooping mode are
omitted here.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.


ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

6-8 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to


open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode

6.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí


Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

Version: B/1 6-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

6.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the AD64 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 6-8.

6-10 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 6-9.

Version: B/1 6-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, and enter 200 in
the Initial Value field. User the default values for other parameters.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

6-12 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-11.

Version: B/1 6-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy Mode

6.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ports of the AD64 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

6-14 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner

6. Return to the Port Enable window, and you will find that the item Enable for all
the ports has been modified to Enable.

7. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed

Version: B/1 6-15


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.1.12 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the proxy mode, check the
equipment status as follows.

6.1.12.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in


the Operational Tree pane.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the current online
multicast group information. See Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

6.1.12.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at Port 1 of the AD64 card in Slot 1
under the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

6-16 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information for the specified port. See Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy Mode

6.1.12.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the multicast address table of the management control card in the current
multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.


InformationíMCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-16.

Version: B/1 6-17


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6.1.12.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the AD64 card in Slot 2 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.


InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6-18 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service


on the VDSL Card in the Controllable Mode

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the controllable
mode.

6.2.1 Configuration Rules

u Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable mode,
whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user interface card,
manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the programs.

u Each VD32 card can provide up to 32 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each VD32 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

6.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

Use the VD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access two controllable multicast services.

Version: B/1 6-19


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Network Diagram

Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the
terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20
transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home
gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access multicast services in the controllable mode using the
AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, a VD32 card is used.

6.2.3 Planning Data

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the


Disabling the Slot No. management control card, being 5 5
Uplink Port fixedly.
Multicast Configure according to the number
Port No. 1
Packet of the actually used uplink port.
Suppression Select Multicast, corresponding to
Packet Type Multicast
multicast service.

6-20 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Disables the multicast packet


Enable/disable Disable
suppression function.

Automatically assigned by the


Service ID 1
system

Configure this item according to


Service Name iptv2
the operator’s network planning.

Configure this item according to


Starting VLAN ID 100
the operator’s network planning.

Configure this item according to


VLAN ID End 200
the operator’s network planning.

Configure according to the number


Port No. GE1
of the actually used uplink port.

Set the VLAN tag property of the


Configuring
uplink service to untag or tag.
Uplink Service
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags
VLAN
of the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag untag form, while the downlink tag
untag packets will be added
with designated tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.

Configuring Configure this item according to


IGMP Mode Controlled mode
Multicast Mode the operator’s network planning.

Configuring Configure this item according to


IGMP Proxy IP 10.26.10.1
IGMP Proxy IP the operator’s network planning.

Configure according to the network


planning of the operator. The
Default SVLAN
default multicast SVLAN ID should 100
Configuring ID
be in the range of the uplink
Multicast
SVLAN.
Default VLAN
Configure according to the network
Default CVLAN
planning of the operator. Retain -
ID
the default value.

Version: B/1 6-21


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Automatically assigned by the


Profile ID 1
system.

Configure this item according to


Configuring Profile Name a
the operator’s network planning.
Multicast
Configure this item according to
Profile Group Address 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
the operator’s network planning.

Configure according to the network


Authority Normal Normal Preview
planning of the operator.

The group address configured in


Group Address 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
the multicast profile

Configure according to the network


planning of the operator. The
Group SVLAN 100 200 100
group SVLAN should be in the
range of the uplink SVLAN.

Configure according to the network


Group CVLAN planning of the operator. Retain - - -
Configure the default value.
multicast
Preview Count Configure according to the network
group - - 5
(Times) planning of the operator.
parameters
Configure according to the network
Preview Time - - 10
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Preview Interval - - 20
planning of the operator.

Configure according to the network


Preview Reset - - 24
planning of the operator.

Preview Total Configure according to the network


- - 50
Time planning of the operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.

The number of the port actually


Port No. 1 2
Configure used by the VD32 card.
multicast port Configure according to the network
parameters Control switch planning of the operator. Select Controllable
controlled mode.
The profile name configured in the
Multicast Mode a
multicast profile

6-22 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure according to the network


Max Online
planning of the operator. Retain 32
Groups (Group)
the default value.
Configure according to the network
Port Bandwidth
planning of the operator. Retain 0
(Kbit/b)
the default value.
Configure according to the network
Fast leave NON FAST LEAVE
planning of the operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.

The number of the port actually


Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Service Type The actual service type Multicast


Configure the VLAN tag
processing mode of the ADSL port
according to the network planning
of the operator.
Configuring a
u TAG: Configures a VLAN
Port Service
tagging to the received data.
VLAN CVLAN Mode Transparent
u Translation: Translates the
original VLAN ID to one
compliant with the operator's
rules.
u Transparent: Transmits the
received data directly.

Configure the received VLAN ID


CVLAN ID according to the network planning 100, 200
of the operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.
Enabling the
The number of the port actually
VDSL Port Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

ENABLEFLAG Port Enable Enable

Version: B/1 6-23


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6.2.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode

6.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port.

6-24 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom


Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the
VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: B/1 6-25


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

6.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Note:

Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable
mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user
interface card, manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the
programs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.


ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode

6-26 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to


open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Controllable Mode

6.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí


Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

Version: B/1 6-27


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode

6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile

Configure the authority of watching programs for a specified multicast group.

Note:

The first row is the blank by default and can not be modified. When
configuring the IGMP Port Parameters, if the user port is not required to
be bound with the multicast profile, the empty profile should be selected.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast Profile &


PortíMulticast Profile.

4. In the left pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new multicast
profile.

5. In the right pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 3 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to add three entries.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-25.

6-28 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile

6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

Configure basic parameters of the multicast group, including group SVLAN, preview
count, preview duration, and preview interval, etc.

Note:

Retain the default preview values of the multicast groups 226.0.1.1 and
226.0.1.2. Only when the multicast groups are in the preview mode can
the preview parameters become valid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.


ConfigíIGMP Group Parameters to access the IGMP Group Parameters
tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-26.

Version: B/1 6-29


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

6.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

Configure the multicast port parameters, including control switch, multicast group
profile, maximum number of online groups, port bandwidth, etc.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.


ConfigíIGMP Port Parameters to access the IGMP Port Parameters tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

6-30 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the VD32 card of the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 1 and 2 at the same time, as shown in Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 6-29.

Version: B/1 6-31


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

6-32 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-31.

Version: B/1 6-33


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable Mode

6.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the ports of the VD32 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-32.

6-34 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)

6.2.15 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the controllable mode,


check the equipment status as follows.

6.2.15.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in


the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, select the group addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2
respectively and click Read from Device on the toolbar to read the current
online multicast group information. It shows that two subscribers are watching
the two multicast programs, as shown in Figure 6-33.

Version: B/1 6-35


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal User

5. Select the group address 226.0.1.3 in the left pane and click Read from
Device on the toolbar to read the current online multicast group information. It
shows that two subscribers are watching the multicast program, as shown in
Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview User

6.2.15.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the
current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

6-36 Version: B/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information at the specified port. See Figure 6-35.

Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Controllable Mode

6.2.15.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the manage control card's multicast address table in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.


InformationíMCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-36.

Version: B/1 6-37


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

6.2.15.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.


InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable Mode

6-38 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

The following introduces how to upgrade the software of cards for the AN5006-20.

Precautions

Upgrading the Management Control Card

Upgrading the Line Card

Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Version: B/1 7-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

7.1 Precautions

Card rebooting is required during upgrade, which may affect the service concerned.
The operators should follow the instructions given below to minimize the impact on
the service.

u It is advised to carry out the upgrade at night when service traffic is at a


relatively low volume.

u Ensure the proper connection between the management VLAN port of the
AN5006-20 and the FTP server. The IP address of the management VLAN and
that of the FTP server are in the same subnet, and users can use the Ping
command on the FTP server to test its connectivity with the equipment before
upgrade operations.

u Save the current software version before the upgrade for fear the upgrade may
fail or the new version may encounter a major problem.

u The file type used for the upgrade should match the card type; otherwise the
upgrade may fail.

u Upgrade the service interface card first and then the management control card,
if both types need upgrade.

7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card for the
AN5006-20.

7.2.1 Upgrade Rules

The management control card must be rebooted after upgrade. Therefore, it is


necessary to save the current configuration to the management control card's Flash
and back up the current configuration and the system software to the FTP server.

7.2.2 Planning Data

The following introduces upgrading the software of the MCUA card as an example.

7-2 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

The planning data for upgrading the management control card software are shown
in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card

Item Description Example

The number of the slot


Related parameters of the card to accommodating the
Core switch card in Slot 05
be upgraded actually used core switch
card
The IP address of the FTP
FTP server IP 10.92.20.168
server that is actually used

The user name of the FTP


FTP username 1
server that is actually used

The password of the FTP


FTP password 1
server that is actually used

Configure the file name in


Task Name system
actual use.

Backing up the Set the cycle to execute


current Execution type this task. Users can select One time
configuration one time or a cycle.
file Select the name of the
Extend ftp
used FTP server.
Information
Repeated Time 2
Configure the file name in
Task Name config
actual use.
Backing up the Set the cycle to execute
system Execution type this task. Users can select One time
software one time or a cycle.

Extend Select the name of the


ftp
Information used FTP server.
Configure the file name in
Task Name upgrade
actual use.
The card to be upgraded.
Upgrading the Object source Select the core switch MCUA[5]
management card.
control card Set the cycle to execute
software Execution type this task. Users can select One time
one time or a cycle.

Extend Select the name of the


ftp
Information used FTP server.

Version: B/1 7-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select or enter the name of


MCU.bin
the upgrade file.

7.2.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the management control card is shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Users can save the configuration data into the FLASH to restore the equipment
configuration in case the upgrade fails or the new version has encountered a
problem.

7-4 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash

4. Click OK, and the system begins to execute the command.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File

Back up all the current configuration files. In case that the upgrade fails, you can
use the backup configuration file to restore the equipment to the state before
upgrade.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

Version: B/1 7-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíConfiguration Export Task,


and click Create to open the Create Configuration Export Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data

7.2.6 Backing up the System Software

Back up the current system software. The system can restore to the software status
before upgrading in case the upgrade fails or a fault occurs in the upgrade version.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíSoftware Backup Task, and


click Create to open the Create Software Backup Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software

7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card's software.

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and
click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.

7-6 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card

Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the


Reset dialog box.

4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,
as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card

7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management


Control Card

Check whether the software version of the management control card is correct after
upgrade.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 7-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open


the Card Version tab.

4. Check whether the software version of the management control card in slot 5 is
correct, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the line cards for the AN5006-20.

7.3.1 Upgrade Rules

Upgrade the software of line cards, including the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card, and the VDSL interface card.

u The cards of the same type can be upgraded in a batch manner.

u The procedures of upgrading the POTS card, the ADSL interface card and the
VDSL interface card are the same.

u The downloaded file types are different for the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card and the VDSL interface card. See Table 7-2 for the association between
the upgrade object and the downloaded file type.

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type

Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type

POTS POTS64 Software


POTS32 POTS32 Software
VD32 AD32 Software
AD64 AD64 Software
VD32 VD32 Software

7-8 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type (Continued)

Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type

CASA CASA
HDT8A HDT8A
HDT8B HDT8B
HD32A HD32A

7.3.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to upgrade the software of the AD64 cards in slots 2
and 4 as an example. See Table 7-3 for the planning data.

Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Item Description Example

Configure according to the number of the


Related parameters of the card to be The ADSL64 cards in
actually used slot for the service interface
upgraded slots 2 and 4.
card.
The file name that is actually used. AD64
Basic Information Set the cycle to execute this task. Users
Upgrading the One time
can select one time or a cycle.
ADSL Interface
Object source Select the card to be upgraded. AD64 card
Card
Select the name of the used FTP server. ftp
Extend Information
File name. AD64.bin

7.3.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the ADSL interface card software is shown in Figure 7-8.

Version: B/1 7-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíBatch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card, and click Create to bring up the Batch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch Manner

7-10 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the


Reset tab.

4. Click the Slot No field, select the slot where the upgraded ADSL interface card
is located from the drop-down list, and click Create on Device on the toolbar to
complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface


Card

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open


the Card Version tab, as shown in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card

Version: B/1 7-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

7.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA


Card

The following introduceshow to upgrade the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.

7.4.1 Upgrade Rule

The management control card will be reset after the uplink subcard of the MCUA
card is upgraded. Therefore, it is necessary to save the current configuration to the
management control card's flash and back up the current configuration to the FTP
server.

7.4.2 Planning Data

Table 7-4 shows the planning data for upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA
card.

Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Item Description Example

Downloaded file type Select the E1 uplink subcard E1 uplink subcard

FTP server IP Configure according to the actual conditions. 10.78.20.122

FTP server username Configure according to the actual conditions. 1


FTP server password Configure according to the actual conditions. 1
Configure according to the actual conditions. The file
File Name V5_RP0101
name should include no more than 20 characters.

7.4.3 Upgrade Flow

Figure 7-12 shows the flow of upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.

7-12 Version: B/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and
click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now, as shown in Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 7-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the


Reset dialog box.

4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,
as shown in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card

7.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink


Subcard

The following introduces how to check the software version of the MCUA card's
uplink subcard after upgrading.

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open


the Card Version tab.

4. Check whether the software version of the MCUA card's uplink subcard in Slot
802 is correct, as shown in Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard

7-14 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

The following introduces differences between the AN5006-20 manual link


aggregation mode and the static LACP aggregation mode and the configure method
of the two link aggregations.

Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode

Configuration Example of Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Version: B/1 8-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

8.1 Configuration Example of Manual


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure manual aggregation mode.

8.1.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual or static


LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.

8.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up a manual
aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

Taking the MCUA card as an example, see Figure 8-1 for the manual aggregation
network diagram.

8-2 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram

The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are connected to the upper layer
switch and the ports are added manually to the aggregation group via the network
management system, so as to achieve load sharing in the aggregation group. When
one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other links in
the aggregation group.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable manual port aggregation.

8.1.3 Planning Data

Table 8-1 shows the planning data of the manual aggregation mode.

Version: B/1 8-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the management control


Slot No. 5
card in actual use.
The port number of the management control
Port No. GE3 GE4
card in actual use.
Enables or disables the auto-negotiation of the
Auto-negotiation Disable
Ethernet port.

The Ethernet port and the GE port support rates


Rate 1000M
of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.

Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The


Duplex mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex Full duplex
mode. Duplex mode is used by default.

Configuring the Enables or disables the flow control function of


Flow control Disable
properties of the the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.
Ethernet ports of Port address Enables or disables the address learning
the management Enable
learning function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.
control card
Enables or disables the port priority function.
Port priority Enable
Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,


Port priority value ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while 0
0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

The interface mode of the Ethernet port;


includes SerDes and SGMII. The default value
is SerDes. When the Ethernet port uses the
Interface mode optical module or forced GE electrical module, SerDes
the SerDes mode is configured. When the
Ethernet port uses the 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
electrical mode, the SMGII mode is configured.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
Configuring link groups; automatically generated by the system.
aggregation Configure the link aggregation mode of the
groups Mode AN5006-20 according to the network planning of Manual Aggregation
the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
groups; automatically generated by the system.
Configuring the
Add the group member port to the LAG
Aggregation Port Member Port
manually according to the network planning of GE3 GE4
Number
the operator.

8-4 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.1.4 Configuration Flow

See Figure 8-2 for the configuration flow of the manual aggregation.

Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation

8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management


Control Card

Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-3.

Version: B/1 8-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Manual
Aggregation

8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí


Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation

8.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports

Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the manual
aggregation group.

8-6 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí


Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation

8.1.8 Configuration Result

The traffic will achieve load sharing automatically on the uplink ports GE3 and GE4
of the link aggregation group on the MCUA card. If one physical link is faulty, traffic
can automatically switch to the other links of the aggregation group.

8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACP


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the static LACP aggregation mode.

8.2.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual and static
LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

Version: B/1 8-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.

8.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up an LACP
aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

The network of the static LACP aggregation is shown in Figure 8-6. Here the MCUA
card is taken as an example.

Figure 8-6 Static LACP Aggregation Network Diagram

8-8 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Connect the GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card with the upper layer
switch, enable the LACP function and add the ports manually to the LAG. The
equipment and the switch determine the link aggregation ports via LACP interaction.
When one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other
links in the aggregation group.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable LACP port aggregation.

8.2.3 Planning Data

See Table 8-2 for the planning data of static LACP aggregation mode.

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the management control card


Slot No. 5
in actual use.
The port number of the management control card
Port No. GE3 GE4
in actual use.
Enables or disables the auto-negotiation of the
Auto-negotiation Disable
Ethernet port.

The Ethernet port and the GE port support rates


Rate 1000M
of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.
Configuring the
Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The
properties of the
Duplex mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex Full duplex
Ethernet ports of
mode. Duplex mode is used by default.
the management
Enables or disables the flow control function of
control card Flow control Disable
the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.

Port address Enables or disables the address learning


Enable
learning function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.

Enables or disables the port priority function.


Port priority Enable
Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,


Port priority value ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while 0
0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

Version: B/1 8-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACP Aggregation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The interface mode of the Ethernet port; includes


SerDes and SGMII. The default value is SerDes.
When the Ethernet port uses the optical module
Interface mode or forced GE electrical module, the SerDes mode SerDes
is configured. When the Ethernet port uses the
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps electrical mode, the SMGII
mode is configured.

LACP switch Enable the static LACP switch Enable


Configuring Configure the system priority of the AN5006-20
LACP global System priority according to the network planning of the 32768
parameters operator.

System ID The CPU MAC address of the AN5006-20 00-0a-c2-88-77-44


Configure the port number of the link aggregation
Port No. according to the network planning of the GE3 GE4
operator.
Configuring
LACP port Port priority The default setting is 32768. 32768
parameters Operation key The default setting is 1. 1
Configure the port timer type according to the
Timer Long Timeout
network planning of the operator.

The AN5006-20 Supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
Configuring link groups; automatically generated by the system.
aggregation Configure the link aggregation mode of the
groups Mode AN5006-20 according to the network planning of Static LACP
the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate


Group ID 1
groups; automatically generated by the system.
Configuring the
Add the member GE port to the LAG manually
Aggregation Port Member Port
according to the network planning of the GE3 GE4
Number
operator.

8.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the static LACP aggregation mode is shown in Figure 8-7.

8-10 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management


Control Card

Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports on the MCUA card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-8.

Version: B/1 8-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Static LACP
Aggregation

8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP function of the AN5006-20.
When the LACP function is enabled, the equipment will run the LACP, perform
protocol interaction with the uplink switch and determine the link aggregation ports.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP


Global Config to bring up the LACP Global Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

8-12 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP parameters of the aggregation
ports.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP


Port Config to bring up the LACP Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: B/1 8-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí


Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-11.

Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports

Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the static
LACP aggregation group manually.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí


Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACP Aggregation

8-14 Version: B/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.10 Configuration Result

The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are added to the static LACP
aggregation group manually. And the equipment runs the LACP, performs protocol
interaction with the uplink switch and determines the link aggregation ports.

Version: B/1 8-15


9 Configuring the Power and
Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure the power supply and environment
monitoring for the AN5006-20.

Configuring Environment Monitoring

Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Configuring the Charging Mode

Resetting the HCU-20 Card

Enabling the Rectifier Module

Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card

Version: B/1 9-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure environment monitoring.

9.1.1 Configuration Rules

u An HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card can be bound to only one
threshold profile, while a threshold profile can be bound to multiple ports.

u The alarms are divided into two categories: status alarms and threshold alarms.

4 The status alarms are reported by the HCU-20 card indicating abnormal
state of the system.

4 As for the threshold alarms, users can set the alarm threshold values via
the threshold profile, and the system compares its performance values
with the threshold values to decide whether to report the alarms or clear
the alarms.

u Table 9-1 shows the relationship among the alarm codes, alarm report
threshold ranges and default values, and alarm clearing threshold ranges and
default values.
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters

Alarm Report Threshold Alarm Clearing Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

Threshold [0.00,19.90]; the default value is [0.00,19.90]; the default value is


HUM_DOWN %RH
alarm 0.00. 0.00.
ENV_TEMP_ Threshold [0.00,19.90]; the default value is [0.00,19.90]; the default value is

DOWN alarm 0.00. 0.00.
Threshold [50.00,109.90]; the default value [50.00,109.90]; the default value is
HUM_OVER %RH
alarm is 90.00. 90.00.
ENV_TEMP_ Threshold [35.00,70.00]; the default value [35.00,70.00]; the default value is

OVER alarm is 55.00. 55.00.
Threshold [230.00,300.00]; the default [230.00,300.00]; the default value
ACVOLOVER V
alarm value is 280.00. is 280.00.
Threshold [130.00,220.00]; the default [130.00,220.00]; the default value
ACVOLDOWN V
alarm value is 170.00. is 170.00.
Threshold [55.00,58.50]; the default value [55.00,58.50]; the default value is
DCVOLOVER V
alarm is 57.00. 57.00.

9-2 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Report Threshold Alarm Clearing Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

Threshold [42.00,50.00]; the default value [42.00,50.00]; the default value is


DCVOLDOWN V
alarm is 45.00. 45.00.
Threshold [10.00,39.90]; the default value [10.00,39.90]; the default value is
OVERCURRE A
alarm is 30.00. 30.00.
Threshold [50.00,69.90]; the default value [50.00,69.90]; the default value is
BDCVLOVER V
alarm is 59.00. 59.00.
Threshold [43.00,49.00]; the default value [43.00,49.00]; the default value is
BDCVLDOWN V
alarm is 45.00. 45.00.
RETEMP- Threshold [40.00,90.00]; the default value [40.00,90.00]; the default value is

OVER alarm is 80.00. 80.00.
BATTERY_
TEMPERA-
Threshold [40.00,89.90]; the default value [40.00,89.90]; the default value is
TURE_OVER_ ⇤
alarm is 60.00. 60.00.
THRESHOLD_
ALARM
ARRESTER_ Status
- - -
BREAK alarm
Status
FIRE_ALARM - - -
alarm
DOOR_ Status
- - -
ACCESS alarm
BATTERY_ Status
- - -
FUSE_BREAK alarm
LOAD_FUSE_ Status
- - -
BREAK alarm
AC_
Status
BREAKER_ - - -
alarm
OPEN
RECTIFIER_
Status
MODULE_ - - -
alarm
ALARM
Status
FAN_ALARM - - -
alarm
Status
HEAT_ALARM - - -
alarm
Status
SHAKE - - -
alarm

Version: B/1 9-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Report Threshold Alarm Clearing Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

INFRARED_
Status
DETECT_ - - -
alarm
ALARM
Status
FLOOD - - -
alarm
Status
SMOKE - - -
alarm
AIR_
Status
CONDITION- - - -
alarm
ER_ALARM

AC_POWER_ Status
- - -
FAIL alarm

9.1.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an
example. See Table 9-2 for the planning data.

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance

Item Description Example

Profile ID Read only. -


Configure it according to actual situation. Maximum length:
Profile Name 20 characters. The acceptable character collection is 0 to 9, test1
a to z, A to Z and the underline.
Configuring Configure this item according to the planning of the
the operator. The options include board and port.. When the
threshold Object Class is set to None, the Object Type is null; when
profile the Object Class is set to other values, set the Object Type
Object Class Board
to the one corresponding to the object class. For the
configuration of the equipment power supply and
environment monitoring, only two options are valid: Board
and Port.

9-4 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure it according to actual situation.


If the Object Class is set to Board, the Object Type should
Object Type be set to HCU-20. HCU-20
If the Object Class is set to Port, the Object Type should be
set to LINE-20.
Configure this item according to the planning of the
operator.
If the Object Class is set to Board, the alarm code options
include HUM_DOWN, ENV_TEMP_DOWN, ACVOLOVER,
ACVOLDOWN, DCVOLOVER, DCVOLDOWN, HUM_
Alarm Code OVER, ENV_TEMP_OVER, etc. ACVOLOVER
If the Object Class is set to Port, the alarm code options
includeOVERCURRE, BDCVLOVER, BDCVLDOWN,
RETEMPOVER, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_OVER_
THRESHOLD_ALARM, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_
DOWN_THRESHOLD_ALARM, etc.

Configure the item according to the network planning of the


operator. The options are Enable and Disable.
AlarmThresholdS- When it is set to Enable, the NMS will deliver the threshold
Enable
witch profile parameters configured by the users to the equipment.
When it is set to Disable, the NMS will deliver the default
settings of the threshold profile to the equipment.

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,


the NMS will report the alarm when the performance value
of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is higher
AlarmReportThres- than the set value.
280.00
hold If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
NMS will report the alarm when the performance value of
the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than
the set value.
AlarmReportThre- Read only. The alarm report threshold value should be set
[230.00,300.00]
sholdRange within the alarm report threshold range.

Version: B/1 9-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Item Description Example

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,


the NMS will clear the alarm when the performance value of
the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than
the set value and display the alarm end time. The value of
the ClearingAlarmThreshold should be smaller than or equal
to the value of AlarmReportThreshold in this case.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
NMS will prompt that the alarm is cleared when the
performance value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the
ClearingAlarm- HCU-20 card is higher than the set value. The value of the
280.00
Threshold ClearingAlarmThreshold should be larger than or equal to
the AlarmReportThreshold in this case.
If the AlarmReportThreshold and ClearingAlarmThreshold
are set to the same value, there is only one threshold value
for the alarm. If the alarm type is set to an overhigh
performance value, the alarm will be cleared when the
actual performance value is lower than the threshold value.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
alarm will be cleared when the actual performance value is
higher than the threshold value.

ClearingAlarmThre- Read only. The clearing alarm threshold value should be set
[230.00,300.00]
sholdRange within the clearing alarm threshold range.

Object Name Select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card. HCU-20
Binding the The name of the existing threshold profile. For a bound
threshold threshold profile, you can select Unbind from the drop-down
Profile Name test1
profile list to unbind it from the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-
20 card.

9-6 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.3 Configuration Flow

Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance

9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile

This command is used to configure the alarm codes, the threshold values for
clearing and reporting the alarms of the threshold profile, and enable threshold
alarming by binding the profile to a card or a port.

Note:

A bound threshold profile cannot be deleted unless being unbound first.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold


Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile tab.

4. Click the blank area on the left side of the PM Threshold Profile tab, click the
Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK.

Version: B/1 9-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile

This command is used to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card or the port
on the HCU-20 card, so as to perform the threshold alarm. The following takes
binding the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold


Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile Bind to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile Bind tab.

4. One the left pane of the tab, select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card, and
then select test1 from the drop-down list of the corresponding profile name on
the right pane.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9-8 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.6 Configuration End

Configure a threshold profile with the alarm code ACVOLOVER (AC voltage
overhigh), and bind the profile with the HCU-20 card. When the AC voltage of the
card is higher than the set alarm report threshold, the NMS will report the alarm.
When the AC voltage of the card is lower than the set clearing alarm threshold, the
alarm will be cleared.

9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring


Parameters

Configure the parameters of the power system for the HCU-20 card to guarantee
normal operation of the power system and ensure reliability of the power supply.
The planning data for configuring the parameters of environment monitoring are
shown in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Item Description Example

Read-only. The HCU-20 card is managed as a


Slot No. particular card with a dedicated slot number 801
801 in the network management system.

Configure this item according to the planning


Batteryfill back
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
coefficient value
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Batteryfill value of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configuring the
Configure this item according to the planning
environment Batteryfill limit_current
of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to 8.0
monitoring value (A)
999.0, and the default value is 8.0 (unit: A).
parameters
Configure this item according to the planning
Batteryfill circle value
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
(H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Configure this item according to the planning


Batteryfill time value
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
(H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Configure this item according to the planning


Battery_fill time
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
stoptime (H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Version: B/1 9-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

temperature_ Configure this item according to the planning


compensate_ of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
coefficient 200.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Temperature Batteryfill
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 25.0
Basic (⇤)
30.0, and the default value is 25.0 (unit: ⇤).

Configure this item according to the planning


Volt Fill Adjust Value of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Temperature Fill Adjust
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
Value
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Communte float
of the operator. The value ranges from 45.0 to 54.0
charge volt (V)
57.0, and the default value is 54.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte equal
of the operator. The value ranges from 52.0 to 55.0
charge volt (V)
58.5, and the default value is 55.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte num (Unit) of the operator. The value ranges from 0 to 12, 2
and the default value is 2 (unit: Unit).

Configure this item according to the planning


of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to
Battery Capacity (AH) 100.0
999.0, and the default value is 100.0 (unit:
AH).

Configure this item according to the planning


Sound Alarm Switch of the operator. Two options are available: close
"open" and "close".

Configure this item according to the planning


Battery switch volt (V) of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 43.0
47.0, and the default value is 43.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Load switch volt (V) of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 45.0
50.0, and the default value is 45.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte limit_
of the operator. The value ranges from 2.0 to 11.0
current value (A)
50.0, and the default value is 11.0 (unit: A).

9-10 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 43.0 to 48.0
voltage (V)
51.0, and the default value is 48.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 30.0 to 30.0
time (min)
60.0, and the default value is 30.0 (unit: min).

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 60.0
capacity (%)
90.0, and the default value is 60.0 (unit: %).

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíHCU Para Config to


open the HCU Para Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode

Configure the charging mode for the storage battery using the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: B/1 9-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, selectCommon ConfigíCharging mode to


bring up the Charging mode tab.

4. Select the desired charging mode.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode

9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to reset the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the


Reset tab. Select reset card 801 from the drop-down list of the Slot No..

4. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module

The following introduces how to enable the rectifier module.

9-12 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíRectifier module


enable to bring up the Rectifier module enable tab.

4. Double-click the Module No. field, fill in the number of the rectifier module to be
configured, and then select Enable or Disable.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-


20 Card

The following introduces how to view the instant performance of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Current
Performance from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current
Performance tab. Then you can check the instant performance of the current
HCU card. See Figure 9-8.

Version: B/1 9-13


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card

9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to view the current alarms of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment Device, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current Alarm tab.
Then you can check the alarms currently existing in the HCU card. See
Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card

9-14 Version: B/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20


Card

The following introduces how to view the alarm history of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Alarm History
from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Alarm History tab. Then
you can check the alarm history of the HCU card. See Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card

Version: B/1 9-15


10 Test Function

The following introduces the subscriber line test function and the Ping test function
of the AN5006-20.

Subscriber Internal Line Test

Subscriber External Line Test

Ping Test

Version: B/1 10-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber internal line test.

10.1.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.1.2 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the subscriber internal line test is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber internal line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the internal line test command to the management
control card.

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10-2 Version: B/1


10 Test Function

10.1.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-2 shows the flow chart for the subscriber internal line test.

Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The internal line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and
facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 4 as an
example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up


the 112 Test tab.

4. Select the line with the port number 1, and then select Inline Test from the
drop-down list of the Test Mode field, and no force test from the Test Type
field.

5. Select the current line, and click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to
apply the configuration to the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-3.

Version: B/1 10-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

Check the result of the subscriber internal line test.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíInline Test to open the
Inline Test tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

10.1.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

10-4 Version: B/1


10 Test Function

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.

The parameters like Signal Tone State, Feeder Voltage State, and Loop Current
State are in either of the two states: normal or abnormal.

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber external line test.

10.2.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.2.2 Signal Flow

Figure 10-5 shows the signal flow in the subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber external line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the external line test command to the management
control card.

Version: B/1 10-5


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10.2.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-6 shows the flow of subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

When a fault occurs in the subscriber telephone line, the external line test can be
implemented to check whether the physical connection of the POTS card is normal
and facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 1 as an
example.

10-6 Version: B/1


10 Test Function

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up


the 112 Test tab.

4. Click the Add button in the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
configuration entry.

5. Double-click the Test Mode field and select OutLine Test from the drop-down
list.

6. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down
list.

7. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to
the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

Check the 112 external line test result.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíOutline Test to open


the Outline Test tab.

Version: B/1 10-7


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

10.2.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.

The Port Status and the corresponding fault causes are described as follows:

u normal: The subscriber line is connected with the phone.

u line break: The subscriber line is not connected with the phone and the port
status is abnormal.

u shorted: The subscriber line A is connected with the subscriber line B, and the
port status is abnormal.

u poor insulation: The subscriber line is grounded, and the port is in abnormal
status.

u Not hung up: The telephone is not hung up, and the port status is abnormal.

u Line interfere: The subscriber lines A and B are connected with the battery, and
the port status is abnormal.

10-8 Version: B/1


10 Test Function

10.3 Ping Test

The following introduces the purpose and procedures of the Ping test.

10.3.1 Test Purpose

The Ping test is used to check the network connectivity. The AN5006-20 transmits
the ICMP echo request message to the destination IP address, and reports whether
it has received the desired ICMP echo reply. It can be learned from the test result
whether two network devices are well connected as well as the information such as
packet loss rate and network delay.

10.3.2 Ping Test

The following introduces how to implement the Ping test.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Test TaskíVOIP PING Task, and click Create to open
the Create VOIP PING Task dialog box.

3. In the Parameter Settings group box, enter the destination IP address in the
Destination IP text box, as shown in Figure 10-9.

Version: B/1 10-9


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters

Note:

See Table 10-1 for Ping test parameters.

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters

Parameter Title
Select this check box and set the quantity of Tx packets in the text box. The value ranges from 0
-n
to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4.
Select this check box and set the timeout interval of the waiting period in the text box. The value
-w
ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4000; unit: ms.

Select this check box and set the size of the packet in the text box (unit: byte). The value ranges
-l
from 0 to 65 500 and the default value is 32.
Select this check box and set the TTL value in the text box. The value ranges from 1 to 255 and
-i
the default value is 128.
Select this check box and set the TOS value in the text box. The value ranges from 0 to 255 and
-v
the default value is 0.

10-10 Version: B/1


10 Test Function

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Title
Select this check box and set the hop count of the routers sending and receiving packets in the
-r
text box. The value ranges from 1 to 9 and the default value is 1.

Select this check box and set the timeslot of the route hop count in the text box. It is similar to -r,
-s but does not record the route via which the packet returns. The value ranges from 1 to 4, and the
default value is 1.
Select this check box and the user can ping the designated computer until pressing down Ctrl + C
-t
to terminate.
-a Select this check box to resolve the address to the host name.
Select this check box to set "no-segmentation" of the data packet, so that the packet will not be
-f
segmented by gateway of the route.

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host
-j IP" group box. Consecutive computers can be separated by intermediate gateways (loose source
route). Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host
-k IP" group box. Consecutive computers cannot be separated by the intermediate gateway (route
strict source) Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

4. Click OK and return to the VOIP PING Test window.

5. Click Execute Now and the test result will be displayed in the right pane, as
shown in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10 Ping Test

10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result

After the Ping test is completed, the test result will be displayed in the right pane of
the VOIP PING Task window, and you can check the following items.

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result

Item Description

Object Info The equipment to execute the Ping command.

Destination IP The IP address of the destination host


Send Message Number The number of ICMP packets transmitted by the equipment

Version: B/1 10-11


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result (Continued)

Item Description

Number of Received Packets The number of ICMP packets received by the equipment

Maximum Delay The maximum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Minimum Delay The minimum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Average Delay Time The average interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received

Packet Loss Rate The ratio of the lost data packets to the total number of data packets transmitted

10-12 Version: B/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

The following introduces the functions and procedures of the FTP operations.

A.1 Function Overview

Connect the computer with the equipment using the network cable, and set up the
FTP server end on the computer; that is, install the WFTP software. During
equipment upgrade, the equipment obtains the upgrade package from the FTP
server in the FTP mode. During equipment backup, the equipment exports the
backup files to the FTP server end in the FTP mode.

A.2 Procedure

The following uses an example to describe how to use the WFTP software. Create
an FTP user with the user name 1 and the password 1, and set the path for saving
the upgrade / backup package to d:\ftp.

Procedure

1. At the FTP server end, set the path for saving the upgrade / backup package to
d:\ftp.

2. Open the WFTP window, as shown in Figure A-1.

Figure A -1 Opening the WFTP Software

Version: B/1 A-1


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

3. Click SecurityíUsers/Rights in the menu bar to start user configuration, as


shown in Figure A-2.

Figure A -2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI

4. In the User/Rights Security Dialog window that appears, click the New User
button to create a new FTP user. This user account will be used in upgrading
and backup later on. Enter the username 1, as shown in Figure A-3.

Note:

Click the Delete button to delete an existing user, or select an existing


user and click the Change Password button to modify the user’s
password.

Figure A -3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1

A-2 Version: B/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

5. Click the OK button, enter the password 1, and click OK to create a new user,
as shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A -4 Entering User Password 1

6. Enter the directory where the upgrade package / backup package is saved in
the Home Directory field in the User/Rights Security Dialog window. Type
d:\ftp according to the directory setting in Step1, as shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A -5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package

7. Click the Done button to complete the configuration.

8. Click LoggingíLog options in the No log file open window to set the log
function of the WFTP tool, as shown in Figure A-6.

Version: B/1 A-3


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide

Figure A -6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool

9. Select all the check boxes except Winsock Calls in the Logging Options
window, as shown in Figure A-7.

Figure A -7 Logging Options

10. Click the OK button to display the logs. Users can isolate faults using the log
information and determine whether the gets or puts operation is successful
according to the log displayed in the WFTP window.

Now the WFTP configuration is completed.

A-4 Version: B/1


Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.

Documentation Name
Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:


1. How often do you use the documentation?
° Frequently ° Rarely ° Never ° Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
° in starting up a project ° in installing the product ° in daily maintenance ° in trouble
shooting ° Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
° 100% ° 80% ° 50% ° 0% ° Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
° Satisfied ° Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
° Print edition ° Electronic edition ° Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
° Very ° Somewhat ° Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
° Good ° Normal ° Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
° Yes
° No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
° Yes
° No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
° Yes (Please give an example)
° No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)

° Practical ° Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?


° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

You might also like